ἄρχεται
—not historic,
but primary and connected with γέγραπται below. Thuc. means to say ‘what
preceded (i.e. book I.) was an introduction: now
begins (my account of) the war itself.’ Cf.
ἀρξάμενος, I. 1,
1: Diod. XII. 37 τὴν ἱστορίαν ἐντεῦθεν
ἀρξάμενος. Ullrich first rightly explained this passage.
ὁ πόλεμος
—i.e. the
Archidamian War, 431-421; not the whole war to 404.
ἐνθένδε ἤδη
—cf. Aristoph. Ach. 539
κἀντεῦθεν ἤδη πάταγος ἦν τῶν ἀσπίδων,
referring to the outbreak of the war.
ἐνθένδε refers back to I. 146,
i.e. the account of the αἰτίαι
καὶ διαφοραὶ is now concluded. (The other explanation,
referring ἐνθένδε to the attack on
Plataea, is less satisfactory, as ἐνθένδε
is so far from the account of the attempt.)
τῶν ἑκατέροις ξ.
—when
ξύμμαχος is in the gen. plu., it is generally constructed
as an adj., following that of
ξυμμαχεῖν. Thus cacophony is avoided. Contrast I. 18
τοῖς ἑαυτῶν ξυμμάχοις,
IV. 81
τοῖς Ἀθηναίων ξ. ἐν
ᾧ
—neut. Cf. c.
11,
6, 35, 2, = quo tempore. It
expresses not merely time, but includes
circumstances.
ἐν ᾧ=‘during
which period.’
οὔτε...τε
—cf. c.
5,
5.
ἐπεμείγνυντο παρ’ ἀλλήλους
—the ἐπι-expresses reciprocity, as in
ἐπιχρῆσθαι. During the period of suspicion which preceded
war, ἐπεμείγνυντο καὶ παρ’ ἀλλήλους
ἐφοίτων ἀκηρύκτως μέν,
ἀνυπόπτως δ’ οὔ, 1.146.
καταστάντες
—sc. ἐς
πόλεμον , when once
they
had definitely started. Cf. c.
9,
1
and I. 49,
3. This refers to the interval between the attempt at Plataea and the
invasion of Attica.
ξυνεχῶς
—down to the truce that preceded the
Peace of Nicias. Cf. v. 24
ταῦτα τὰ δέκα ἔτη ὁ πρῶτος πόλεμος ξυνεχῶς
γενόμενος , VI. 26
ἄρτι δ’
ἀνειλήφει ἡ πόλις ἑαυτὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ ξυνεχοῦς πολέμου.
γέγραπται
—sc.
μοι.—This resumes
ἄρχεται, but γέγραπται
is probably impersonal, Thuc. meaning
γέγραφα. Attic prose shows a marked preference for perf.
pass. over perf. act. forms in 3rd sing.
Thus ἃ πέπρακταί μοι is far commoner
than ἃ
πέπραχα, which is quite rare.
γέγραφα occurs once in Thuc., γέγραπται
ἐγέγραπτο or partic. nine times.
ἑξῆς
—explained by κατὰ
θ. καὶ χειμῶνα. Distinguish between
τάξις, the arrangement of the subject
matter as a whole, διαίρεσις, the divisions in which the separate events are
grouped, ἐξεργασία, the treatment of the separate events.
It is to the
διαίρεσις that Thuc. refers.
ὡς ἕκαστα ἐγίγνετο
—neut. plu. is used of the
several events, just as Thuc. uses αὐτὰ
constantly of the details of the subject he is dealing with.
κατὰ θ. καὶ χειμῶνα
—as Thuc. begins his account of
each summer with the first event of the new campaign, the summer in his
history does not always begin exactly at the same time. Thus in 429, the
account of summer begins with the Peloponnesian expedition against
Plataea, which took place ἀκμάζοντος
τοῦ σίτου, i.e. 80 days after the
opening of spring (II. 71,
1; 79, 1; cf. c.
19,
1
and 2, 1). In 428 the account of the summer only
begins ἅμα τῷ ἦρι
ἀκμάζοντι (III. 1,
1). Phormio's arrival at Piraeus did not occur till spring had opened;
but, for the sake of convenience, that event is tacked on to the
preceding winter (II. 103
).
But usually the opening of spring is reckoned with summer. Autumn also
is counted with summer. Though Steup maintains that summer and winter
are of equal length in Thuc., Poppo's view, that the summer consists of
eight months (Elaphebolion to Pyanepsion) is probably correct. Thus the
winter is from Maemacterion to Anthesterion.
γὰρ
—takes up
ἄρχεται and introduces the narrative. So c.
49,
τὸ μὲν
γαρ ἔτος takes up δηλώσω.
ἐνέμειναν
—the
aor. of a single historical fact. M.
T. 56, 57 (sometimes called ‘complexive).’
Εὐβοίας ἅλωσιν
—Euboea revolted at the
same time as Megara, 445 B.C. See I. 114,
115. The place of the article is taken by the gen., as
often. Cf. I. 1
διὰ χρόνου πλῆθος. Comparing this
phrase with c.
49,
4 μετὰ
ταῦτα λωφήσαντα, VI.
3,
3 μετὰ
Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας, II 68
ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀμπρακιωτῶν
ξυνοικησάντων, VI.
80,
2, and
similar predicative uses of the partic. collected by Stahl, Quaest.
Gram. p. 28, we might suppose that Thuc. could have written μετὰ
Εὔβοιαν ἁλοῦσαν, just as below we have ἐπὶ
Χρυσίδος ἱερωμένης, but, with the solitary exception
of ἅμα with expressions of time,
as ἄμα
τῷ σίτῳ ἀκμάζοντι, it is improbable that this
convenient use of the partic. was ever employed
unless the expression made sense
without the partic., which would not be the case here. This
convenient use is of course much commoner in Latin than in Greek.
ἐπὶ Χρυσίδος
—Argos, though humbled by Sparta, 495 B.C., was still the third
state in Greece. The Argives reckoned by the number of years
during
which the priestess of Hera had held office. Hellanicus had
written
a work on the Priestesses of Argos, using them as marks for the
dates.
Αἰνησίου
—sc.
ἐπί: so with Πυθοδώρου. ἐφόρου
—i.e. the Ephor
ἐπώνυμος. The omission of
ὄντος, for which cf. v. 25,
1, is rare except in dates. ἐφόρου ὄντος
= ἐφορεύοντος. τέσσαρας
μῆνας
—the
archons entered on office on the 1st of Hecatombaeon, which in 431
B.C. fell on August 1st. To express a period of time,
the pres. (or imperf.) or perf. (or pluperf.) participle is used: to
supply the reference to the completion of the
period, (a) ἤδη
is added, in primary sequence, which becomes
τότε in secondary sequence: both refer to a period past at
the time of speaking: (b) ἔτι referring to the completion of a
period in the future. Thus v.
112,
2 οὔτ’
ἐν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ πόλεως ἑπτακόσια ἔτη ἤδη οἰκουμένης τὴν
ἐλευθερίαν
ἀφαιρησόμεθα, and observe τότε
ἱερωμένης and ἔτι ἄρχοντος
here. The four months are Elaphebolion, Munychion, Thargelion,
Scirophorion.
Ἀθηναίοις
—cf. 1. 93
ἀρχὴν ἄρχειν
Ἀθηναίοις, but in v.
25
ἄρχοντος Ἀθήνησι. The dative is
probably local. Cf. c.
86
and 92
ἀπὸ τῶν
Ἀθηναίων for ἀπὸ τῶν
Ἀθηνῶν. [
μετὰ τὴν μηνὶ ἕκτῳ
]. Reasons for regarding these
words as a later addition to the text are
1. Nearly a year (I.
125
) intervened between
the day on which the allies of Sparta decided to go to war and the
first invasion of Attica (c.
19
).
Between the battle of Potidaea and the decision came the events
recorded in I.63-88,
118-125. The invasion was 80 days after the attempt on
Plataea (c.
19
).
So for the period between the battle at Potidaea and the attempt on
Plataea we get nearly a year minus 80 days and the time
occupied
by
the
events of I. 63-88, 118-125. The
result must clearly be more than six months But Lipsius' ἕκτῳ καὶ δεκάτῳ probably gives too much
time: thus, from battle at Potidaea to attempt on Plataea = 15
months; from attempt on Plataea to invasion of Attica = 80 days.
Total about 17 1/2 months. Deducting nearly a year for the time
between the decision of the allies and the invasion, we get about 6
1/2 months, at least, for the events of
I.63-88, 118-125. These
events were as follows: the Athenians built a wall on the north side
of Potidaea and garrisoned it. After a considerable interval (χρόνῳ ὕστερον) Phormio was sent from
Athens with 1600 hoplites. He spent some time on the road (κατὰ βραχὺ προιών). On arriving, he
built a wall south of Potidaea. The Corinthians called a meeting of
allies at Sparta. The Spartans sent to Delphi. Then a general
meeting of allies was held at Sparta. at which the decision was come
to. It is not clear whether the Corinthians proposed the first
meeting after the north wall was built, or only after the south wall
was finished. It is however highly improbable that they waited to
take action till Potidaea was completely shut in; for they were most
anxious about Potidaea, and were anxious to force on war. The
Athenians would occupy about a month in building the north wall.
Thus the Corinthians probably suggested the meeting about 40 days
after the battle. Thus, the whole time would only be about 40 days +
the time taken in the mission to Delphi and the calling of the
second meeting. 2. The bracketed
words give no additional indication of the date of the attempt on
Plataea. Thuc. wishes to be precise here, but he has given no
definite indication of the date of the battle at Potidaea, nor was
it necessary to do so. He says (1) the decision of the allies was
some 11 months before the invasion, (2) the invasion was 80 days
after the attempt. All that could be found from μηνὶ
ἕκτῳ would be the date of the battle of Potidaea. If
any event were here referred to it would rather be the decision of
the allies.
ἅμα ἦρι ἀρχομένῳ
—the last day of
Anthesterion, in 431 April 4th. See c.
4,
2
βοιωταρχοῦντες
—the
11 chiefs of the Boeotian confederacy, of whom Thebes elected
two,
the other cities one each.
περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον
—cf.
VII. 43
ἀπὸ
πρώτου ὕπνου. When the article is omitted with
expressions of time, a preposition is usually
present, except with
ἡμέρας and νυκτός.
See Rutherford, Syntax, p. 4. There were
three watches, the first beginning about 10 o'clock.
ξὺν ὅπλοις
—in later Attic, except
Xenophon, σὺν has only two uses;
(1) the old phrase σὺν (τοῖς)
θεοῖς, (2) in enumerating things which are thrown
together in a sum total; so that σὺν
is very rare with persons, and it never
implies a willing connection. Andoc. II. 7 τὸν
πατέρα σὺν ἐμαυτῷ ἀποκτεῖναι. Of (1) Thuc. has 1 example, II. 86
;
of (2) 11 examples, e.g. (a)
with things —c. 13
, 77,; v.
26
ξὺν τῷ
πρώτῳ πολέμῳ τοσαῦτα ἔτη. Cf.
VII. 42
; VIII. 90, 95:
(b) with persons,
comparatively common in Thuc., I.
12
; II. 6, 13 ; IV. 124
; v. 74
.
Besides these, Thuc. has the old military phrase, ξὺν (τοῖς
) ὅπλοις, 8 times. Cf. Eur. Hec. 112.
Aristoph. Nub, 560. In the same class fall ξὺν ἑνὶ ἱματίῳ,
II. 70,
ψιλοὶ ξὺν
ξιφιδίῳ and ξὺν δορατίοις
III. 22.
Cf. the Homeric σὺν τεύχεσι.
Further, 6 cases of verbal nouns which modify the meaning of a verb, viz.: ξὺν
ἐπαίνῳ ἐξοτρύνειν
I.
84,
ξὺν
κατηγορίᾳ παροξύνειν
ib.,
ξὺν χαλεπότητι παιδεύεσθαι
ib.,
ξὺν φόβῳ ἔχειν τι
I. 141,
ξὺν ἀνάγκῃ τι παθεῖν
III. 40,
ξὺν
προφάσει κακῶς ποιεῖν
ib. The
absence of this archaic idiom from the later books is remarkable.
Lastly, 3 cases of a connection willingly formed,
viz. : II. 58
; III. 90
; VII. 57
.
This is common in Tragedy and Xenophon. In inscriptions of the
classical period only the Attic use marked (2) above is found, and
that never with persons.
ἐπηγάγοντο
—the
τάξις (see on c.
1
)
of this c. is dramatic, the causes which led to the attempt being
given parenthetically in 2 and 3, while the narrative is continued
at 4.
Πλαταιῶν ἄνδρες
—the Thebans call them, III. 65,
ἄνδρες
οἱ πρῶτοι καὶ χρήμασι καὶ γένει. These leaders of the
aristocratic party represent the great land-owners as distinct from
the merchants.
ἄνδρας τοὺς ὑπεναντίους
—the order, noun, art,
adj., puts emphasis on the adj. Cf. c.
34,
4.
ἔπραξαν
—of manipulation or diplomacy, as
often. Cf. c.
5,
7. An abuse of the meaning ‘to succeed.’
ἔσοιτο
—was
certain. Cf. c.
13,
1.
ἔτι ἐν εἰρήνῃ
—cf.
III. 13
ἔτι ἐν
τῇ εἰρήνῃ, and c.
5,
4. Here τε
καὶ joins a positive to a negative expression which
merely repeats it from another point of view. Cf. v. 9,
2 τῷ τε κατ’ ὀλίγον καὶ μὴ ἄπαντας
κινδυνεύειν.
μήπω
—the sentence expresses a wish.
ᾗ καὶ ρᾷον
—cf. ᾗ
καὶ μᾶλλον I. 11, 25; III. 13
;
IV. 1, 103.
ᾗ
καὶ before a comparative adverb emphasizes an
inference.
ἔλαθον ἐσελθόντες
—see M.
T. 144, 146, 887.
προκαθεστηκυίας
—Pp. compares anteponere vigilias, Tac. An. I. 50.
θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα
—cum
in foro constitissent, lit. ‘having grounded their arms.’
τοῖς ἐπαγομένοις
—the temporal force is
lost, and the partic. becomes a substantive, as in οἱ
προδιδόντες c. 5.
ἐπείθοντο ὥστε
—cf. c. 101, 5.
ὥστε
is often inserted with verbs which
take simple infin., the main emphasis is transferred from the finite
to the infin. M. T. 588.
ἔργου ἔχεσθαι
—rem
aggredi. Cf. 1.49, 7 , 78, 3.
ἰέναι ἐς
—for the hostile sense of ἰέναι cf. v. 69
ἐς τὴν γῆν ἐλθεῖν, ‘to attack.’
ἐπὶ is commoner than ἐς,
as I. 58
ἢν ἐπὶ
Ποτείδαιαν ἴωσιν. Cf. c.
3,
4.
ἔρχομαι, εἶμι,
ἥκω, ἦλθον and
synonyms are far more supple in sense than our ‘to come.’ Note that
the moods of
εἶμι are usually present in meaning, except in Oratio
Obliqua.
γνώμην ἐποιοῦντο
—
i.e.
ἐγίγνωσκον, ‘came to
a decision.’
ἐπιτηδείοις
—so c.
18,
3.
καὶ ἀνεῖπεν
—‘and in fact,’ καὶ introducing the parenthesis and
emphasizing the word following. Cf. c.
49,
5, 51, 5.
εἴ τις βούλεται
—in a protasis to a condition
in Oratio Obliqua, probably only the future
indicative is ever changed into optative, so that the optative in
protasis in Or. Obl., except in the future,
represents either
ἢν and subjunctive or εἰ
and optative of the Recta.
κατὰ τὰ πάτρια
—in
Iliad II. 504 Plataea is enumerated among the Boeotian
confederate cities.
ξυμμαχεῖν
—this may be a gloss on τίθεσθαι κ.τ.λ. Cf. IV.
30
προκαλούμενοι, εἰ βούλοιντο, τὰ ὅπλα
κελεύειν παραδοῦναι, and so 37 ; v. 115
ἐκήρυξαν, εἴ τις
βούλεται, λῄζεσθαι, VII. 82
κήρυγμα ποιοῦνται, εἴ τις βούλεται, ὡς σφᾶς
ἀπιέναι. With βούλομαι
an infinitive has often to be supplied from the context.
ὡς ᾔσθοντο
—cf. c.
5,
4, 31, 1, 94, 3. The
aorist is usual with ὡς, but,
whatever tense is used, it is always independent of that of the main
verb. In this respect ὡς differs
from other temporal particles. Thus if imperf. is used, as in c.
77,
1, or pluperf. as in c.
59,
1, it is because that tense is required to describe a continuous or
completed act, apart from the main verb. If the act in a temporal
sentence is represented as simultaneous with or preceding the action
of the main sentence, ὅτε
or
ἐπειδὴ is used.
ᾔσθοντο
—‘became
aware,’ ingressive aor., a use almost confined to 1st aor.
forms.
ἐξαπιναίως
—this and
ἐξαπίνης, in place of
ἐξαίφνης or αἰφνιδίως,
are Ionic, and only found in Thuc. and Xenophon of Attic prose
writers. [Dem.] c. Neaeram § 99 is copied
from this passage. Cf. c.
48,
2, 93, 3.
καταδείσαντες καὶ ν.
—
ingressive, ‘having become alarmed,’ etc.
πολλῷ πλείους
— sc. ἢ
ἐσῆλθον. An ellipse with comparative is very common.
ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ
—per
noctis
caliginem. Cf. ἐν νυκτὶ
below, and c.
4
ἐν σκότῳ
καὶ πήλῳ.
πρὸς ξ. ἐχώρησαν
—se
converterunt Cf. III.
66
προείπομεν
τὸν βουλόμενον κατὰ τὰ πάντων Βοιῶτων πάτρια
πολιτεύειν ἰέναι πρὸς ἡμᾶς, IV.
120,
VIII. 40,
2.
ἐνεωτέριζον
—the subject is changed, as
in 4 below. Thuc. assumes that his
readers will follow the narrative attentively.
πράσσοντές πως
—the particle implies that
unnecessary details are omitted. Cf. ἄλλως
πως in brief narrative, I. 99,
, VI.2.
κρατήσειν
—Cl. defends
κρατῆσαι, on the ground that the aor. expresses
confidence in the result of the action in
ἐπιθέμενοι. But the aor. inf. is very doubtful used thus
for the future.
τῷ γὰρ πλήθει
—
γὰρ gives the writer's explanation, and shows that οἱ
Πλαταιῆς above was loosely used for τὸ πλῆθος τῶν
Π.
βουλομένῳ ἦν
—so
VII. 35
; VIII. 92,
6. M. T. 900. The editors compare Sallust,
Jug. 84
plebei volenti putabatur
, ib., 100
militibus
labor volentibus esset.
Livy XXI. 50
.
ἐπιχειρητέα εἶναι
—cf. I. 118
ἐπιχειρητέα
ἐδόκει εἶναι πάσῃ προθυμίᾳ. Plur. neut. forms for
sing. are very common in Thuc., especially with verbals.
ξυνελέγοντο
—with παρ’ ἀλλήλους, διορύσσοντες
τοὺς τ.
—cf. τοιχωρύχος.
ἁμάξας τε
—the
conjunction adds a third and important fact, as often.
ᾖ
—sc. αὐτό,
what has just been described, the barrier of waggons.
ἑτοῖμα
—the plur. marks the details of a
complex act. See c.
10,
2
φυλάξαντες ἔτι νύκτα
—cf. VII. 83
τῆς νυκτὸς
φυλάξαντες τὸ ἡσυχάζον. ‘Waited for the time when it
was still night.’
ἔτι νύκτα
is equivalent to τὴν
ἔτι νύκτα.
φυλάξαντες ἔτι νύκτα
—cf c.
2,
1.
καὶ
—adds
the more exact time.
περίορθρον
—the beginning of that time
of night denoted by
ὄρθρος. Cf. IV.
110
νυκτὸς ἔτι καὶ περὶ
ὄρθρον, VI.
101
περὶ ὄρθρον, According to Phrynichus
(Bekker An. Gr. 54, 8) ὄρθρος
ἐστιν ἡ ὥρα
τῆς νυκτὸς καθ’ ἣν ἀλεκτρύονες ᾅδουσιν. ἄρχεται δὲ ἐνάτης
ὥρας
καὶ
τελευτᾷ εἰς διαγελῶσαν ἡμέραν. So in III. 112,
Demosthenes attacked the Ambraciots ἅμα
ὄρθρῳ, at which time they could not distinguish friend
from foe, νυκτὸς ἔτι οὔσης. Thus
the Plataean rally was at about 2 o'clock.
γίγνωνται
—sc. οἱ
Θηβαῖοι. Cf. I.
143
οὐκέτι ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου ἔσται, III. 12,
3.
φοβερώτεροι
—for the passive meaning,
‘timid,’ cf. IV. 128,
4. Conversely ἀδεὴς
which is usually active is occasionally passive =not
formidable. See I.
36,
1. Cf. προστρόπαιος,
ἀλιτήριος, and in Latin
formidolosus and others. See Cook on Sallust, Cat. 39, 2. Shil. quotes Soph. O.
T. 153 φοβερὰν φρένα δείματι
πάλλων.
ἥσσους ὦσι τῆς
—i.e.
ἡσσῶνται equivalent to νικῶνται ὑπὸ τῆς κ.τ.λ.
σφετέρας
—indirect
reflexive, i.e. refers to subject of the main
verb, not to that of its own clause. Cf. c.
83,
3, 89, 4; IV.
37,
1; V. 47
; VII. 48
; VIII. 74,
3. This is the regular use of σφέτερος,
whereas σφέτερος
αὐτῶν is the same as
ἑαυτῶν. But Thuc. also uses
σφέτερος alone as direct reflexive, as IV. 33
οὐκ
ἐδυνήθησαν τῇ σφετέρᾳ ἐμπειρίᾳ χρήσασθαι: and in
dependent clauses, as c.
71
and IV. 11
τας σφετέρας ναῦς καταγνύναι
ἐκέλευε.
ta\ sfe/tera
is direct in c.
20,
4; IV. 99,
1, indirect in III. 68,
3.
προσέβαλόν τε
—
inferential
τε, ‘and so.’
ἔγνωσαν
—‘became
aware,’ ingressive.
ξυνεστρέφοντο
—‘proceeded
to rally,’ imperf. expressing difficulty.
σφίσιν αὐτοῖς
—in c.
65,
12, 76, 2 Thuc. has the Ionic use of σφᾶς
alone as a direct reflexive. See Rutherford,
Syntax, p. 11.
δὶς μὲν ... ἔπειτα
—cf
IV. 115
καὶ μίαν
μὲν ἡμέραν ἀπεκρούσαντο, τῇ δ’ ὑστεραίᾳ. As regards ἔπειτα without
δέ, the ordinary use is
πρῶτον (πρῶτα ) μὲν.
ἔπειτα, which Thuc. uses 28 times; see c.
19,
2, 49, 2, 75, 1, 89, 2, 96, 1,
98, 1. He has πρῶτον (πρῶτα) μὲν ...
ἔπειτα δὲ 8 times; see c. 55, 84. If καὶ follows ἔπειτα,
δὲ is always inserted, e.g. c.
84
; IV. 43
; VII. 23
; VIII. 48
;
also μάλιστα μὲν is always
followed by ἔπειτα
δέ, as c.
54
; I. 75
; VI. 11,
4, 16, 5, 67, 2. If the
more emphatic ἔπειτα μέντοι is
used, it is preceded by τὸ πρῶτον
or τὸ μὲν π., as III. 93,
1, 111, 3; VIII.
75,
1, 86, 2. τὸ μὲν
πρῶτον ..
ἔπειτα occurs I.
131
; V. 41,
3, 84, 2; the same, but ἔπειτα
δὲ c.
48
; v. 41,
2. πρῶτον alone is always answered
by ἔπειτα alone, unless καὶ follows
ἔπειτα, as in VII. 23
τὸ
μέγιστον πρῶτον, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ κ.τ.λ. After other
phrases, ἔπειτα is without
δὲ in 10 cases, has δὲ
in 2, viz. c.
92,
1; I. 18,
3.
κραυγῇ
—Moeris says κεκραγμὸς
Ἀττικοί, κραυγὴ Ἕλληνες, but
κεκραγμός , κέκραγμα and κραυγή are all Attic words. Perhaps
Moeris really wrote κραυγασμὸς
Ἕλληνες, which would agree with Phrynichus.
καὶ
—there is chiasmus here and in λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ.
ὀλολυγῇ
—‘cheering,’ this word is used
regularly of women. Pollux I. 28 ὀλολῦξαι
καὶ ὀλολυγῇ χρήσασθαι ἐπὶ
γυναικῶν. Hence κραυγῇ
goes with οἰκετῶν, ὀλολυγῇ with γυναικῶν. Eur. I. T.
1337 ἀνωλόλυξε
καὶ κατῇδε of Iphigenia; cf.
Aesch. Ag. 587 of Clytaemnestra. Verg. Aen. IV. 667, IX. 477 femineo
ululatu.
τε ... τε
—these join
χρωμένων to βαλλόντων
and represent the two actions as going on simultaneously. Cf. c.
22
ἐκκλησίαν
τε οὐκ ἐποίει ... τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε.
λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ
—no doubt the slaves had
gathered the stones, while the women removed the tiles. For
κέραμος collective, cf. III. 74,
1; IV. 48,
2. So ἔπαλξις c.
13,
κάλαμος c.
76
.
Xen. Mem.
III.
1,
7 λίθοι
καὶ πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα καὶ κέραμος.
διὰ νυκτὸς
—cf. διὰ
παντὸς c. 16, 2.
πολλοῦ
—predicate with ἐπιγενομένου Cf.
VII.
87
αἱ νύκτες ἐπιγιγνόμεναι μετοπωριναὶ καὶ
ψυχραί.
ἐπιγενομένου
—expresses any sudden or
unexpected phenomenon. Cf. c.
64,
1, 70, 1, 77, 5. The other
meaning occurs in 4 below .
οἱ πλείους
—the subject is here limited
by apposition from all to the majority, Cf. I. 2,
6 οἱ ἐκπίπτοντες ... οἱ δυνατώτατοι. So
in Latin, Livy XXI.24, 2
Galli ... aliquot populi.
πηλῷ
—so that progress was impeded. Cf.
c.
5,
2. This shows that the streets of Plataea were bad, like Greek
streets generally. On the outskirts of the town the soil was
certainly soft, and the Thebans fled in the direction of the valley
of the Asopus, so that the further they went, the worse the road
became. Probably in wet weather the streets of the town resembled
water-courses carrying down the water from Cithaeron to the Asopus.
τῶν διόδων
—belongs like ᾗ χρὴ ς. to ἄπειροι
ὄντες.
ᾗ χρὴ
— takes the place of a deliberative
subj. (why?). Cf. I. 91,
1 οὐκ εἶχον ὅπως χρὴ ἀπιστῆσαι.
καὶ γὰρ
—explains only ἐν σκότῳ ,
πηλῷ being already explained in ὑετοῦ ἅμα. τελευτῶντος τοῦ
μηνὸς
—there
was a new moon on the early morning of the 7th April 431, and, as
the Attic months were lunar, assuming the
calendar to have been in perfect order (it must have been in fair order), the month Elaphebolion began at
sunset on the 6th April. The attempt was made at the end of
Anthesterion, on the night of April 4th or 5th. When the calendar
month did not correspond with the true lunar month, the true day of
the new moon was called νουμηνία
κατὰ σελήνην (c.
28
).
ἐμπείρους δὲ ἔχοντες τοὺς δ.
—for ἐμπείρων
δὲ ὄντων τῶν δ. Cf. I. 144
αὐτονόμους ἀφήσομεν εἰ καὶ
αὐτονόμους ἔχοντες ἐσπεισάμεθα.
[τοῦ μὴ ἐκφεύγειν
—this is taken as ne effugereni. (There is another tradition,
due to Kr., that it expresses a
consequence, which is not in good Attic.) It must depend on διώκοντας,—which gives the platitude
that the enemy pursued them that they might not escape. To avoid
this, Cl. explains it as equivalent to τοῦ
μὴ ἐᾶν
ἐκφεύγειν and constructs it with
ἐμπείρους. But (1) there is no other case of
gen, of inf. with adjectives in Thuc., (2) ἐμπείρους
τοῦ ἐκφεύγειν ought to mean ‘experienced in escaping.’
Supply τῶν διόδων with ἐμπείρους. ὥστε
διεφθείροντο οἱ π.
]—the
article, found in BCEFGM and in A corrected, contradicts τὸ
πλεῖστον in 5 below, and ὀγδοήκοντα
καὶ ἑκατὸν c.
5,
7, the number captured out of a force of few over 300 (c.
2,
1), when many others had been killed or had escaped (4 below).
Bekker omits οἱ, followed by most edd., and the imitation of Aen. Pol. 2, 6 is
quoted οἱ
μὲν γὰρ ἔφυγον ἄπειροι ὄντες ᾗ χρὴ σωθῆναι, οἱ δὲ
ἐμπείρως διώκοντες πάνυ πολλοὺς ἔφθειραν. But on
reading the whole chap. to 4, it becomes clear that no results of
the flight are given till 4, where the fate of the whole number is
told: so that these words break the continuity of the narrative.
στυρακίῳ ἀκοντίου
—στυράκιον
λαβών τις ἐν τῷ μοχλῷ τῆς θύρας ἐνέβαλεν, Schol. The στυράκιον is the spike at the top of a
small javelin for fixing it in the ground; = Homeric σαυρωτήρ. This was used instead of the βάλανος or iron pin which was driven
through the
μόχλος (bar) and the door, and could not be removed
without a key (βαλανάγρα,
κλείς), which fitted into it. Arnold remarks that the
action is the same as spiking a gun. Cf. Aristoph. Av.
1159
ἅπαντ’ ἐκεῖνα πεπύλωται πύλαις
καὶ βεβαλάνωται καὶ φυλάττεται κύκλῳ. χρησάμενος
ἐς
—cf. c.
49
ἔδρασαν
ἐς τὰ φρέατα.
διωκόμενοι .. ἀναβάντες
ἔρριψαν
—the 1st partic. gives
the cause of
ἀνάβαντες, while the latter is
temporal to ἔρριψαν. Cf.
c.
59,
3, 76, 1, 90, 3. The 2nd
partic. tends to become a mere adverb to the verb, as c.
90,
1 βουλόμενοι προαγαγεῖν αὐτούς, ἀναγαγόμενοι
ἔπλεον. οἱ μέν τινες ... οἱ
δὲ ... ἄλλοι δὲ ... τὸ δὲ πλεῖστον
—the
partic. διωκόμενοι is subdivided.
Also οἱ
μέν τινες is restricted by οἱ
πλείους.
[λαθόντες καὶ
]—it
is evident that γυναικὸς δούσης πέλεκυν
must be joined with διακόψαντες, but καὶ is in the way of this. But, though
Stahl's reading is given, perhaps Thuc. wrote γυναικὸς
δούσης πέλεκυν καὶ διακόψαντες τὸν μοχλὸν λαθόντες
ἐξῆλθον. There would then be no objection to καί. For the want of symmetry in δούσης καὶ διακόψαντες, see c.
25,
1. For the two participles διακόψαντες,
λαθόντες, the first
temporal, the second defining the
verb, see c.
33,
3. The objection to bracketing καὶ
only is that Thuc. would have written λάθρᾳ
διακόψαντες, as IV.
110
; VIII. 84.
ἄλλοι δὲ ἄλλῃ τῆς
—cf. c.
76
ἄλλας δὲ
ἄλλῃ τοῦ τείχους.
τὸ πλεῖστον ... ἐσπίπτουσιν
—plur. verb after a
collective, as often. Rutherford,
Syntax, p. 21.
ὃ ἦν τοῦ τείχους
—cf. I. 134
οἴκημα ὃ
ἦν τοῦ ἱεροῦ. It was not usual in early times to have
buildings adjacent to the walls. Cf. c.
17,
1 note. Hence the Thebans thought the building was part of the
gate-way, supposing it to be double like the Dipylon at Athens.
Thebes prided herself on her seven great gates, and it is highly
improbable that the pomoerium was thus violated in that city. There
cannot have been many such buildings at Plataea, for in c.
76
we see there was room for a curved wall between the
τεῖχος and the mass of the buildings.
ἀνεῳγμέναι ἔτυχον
—in order to represent
the action as complete, the
perf. partic., not aor., has to be
used with
τυγχάνω, λανθάνω ,
φθάνω, unless the verb is in imperf, or pres. See M. T. 144, 146, 147, 887. Cf. I. 103
Ναύπακτον ἔτυχον ᾑρηκότες.
αὐτοῦ
—in the
second member of a relative sentence the relative is not repeated,
but a demonstrative or personal pron. takes its place. Cf. c.
34,
5, 72, 1, 74, 3.
Exceptions are c.
43,
3, 44, 1, where the relative is repeated. Cf.
‘Whose fan is in His hand, and He shall throughly purge His floor.’
πύλας
—πύλαι
τοῦ
τείχους, θύραι τοῦ οἴκου Schol. Cf. τεῖχος and
τοῖχος. ἄντικρυς
—‘right
through.’ In VI. 49
it means
direct. In all other places in Thuc. downright,
complete, as VIII.
64
ἐπὶ τὴν
ἄντικρυς ἐλευθερίαν. It is said that ἄντικρυς =
φανερῶς , ἄντικρυ (not
found in Thuc.) = ἐξ ἐναντίας .
κατακαύσωσιν
—cf. c.
52
οὐκ ἔχοντες ὅ τι γένωνται. ὥσπερ
ἔχουσιν
—sc. οἱ Θηβαῖοι, on
the
spot. Often in Thuc., but later Atties use οὕτως in much the same sense.
τὰ ὅπλα καὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς
—the phrase is common, and the
order is always the same. Cf. IV. 21,
3, 30, 4, 37, 2, 38, 3. Livy XXII.
60,
24 and 26
arma et vos
ipsos traditis.
χρήσασθαι ὅ τι ἂν β.
—with χρήσασθαι supply σφίσι only. Cf. c.
24,
2.
χρήσασθαι expresses purpose,
the act. or mid. being regular in this construction even when the
pass. might seem more suitable. M. T. 770.
The phrase is regular in the terms of a complete surrender. Cf. IV. 69,
3; VII. 85,
1. Andoc. I. 11, 26.
μὲν δὴ
—dismisses
the subject.
ἐπεπράγεσαν
—the pluperf shows that Thuc.
has anticipated: in c.
5
he goes back.
ἔδει παραγενέσθαι
—‘ought to have reached
Plataea.’ M. T. 415. Cf. c.
92,
7, 95, 3.
εἴ τι ἄρα
—cf. c.
12,
1. The following are noteworthy: (1) εἴ
μὴ
ἄρα = nisi
forte, e.g. Xen.
Mem. I. 2, 8 πῶς ἂν οὖν ὁ
τοιοῦτος
ἀνὴρ
διαφθείροι τοὺς νέους; εἰ μὴ
ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν. (2) εί ἄρα in indirect
questions, e.g. Plat. Phaedo, 95 B πειρώμεθα εί ἄρα
τι λέγεις. (3) εἰ ἄρα
or ἢν ἄρα in protasis, as I. 140
ἢν ἄρα τι καὶ σφαλλώμεθα . ἄρα implies a quite unlikely
contingency.
προχωροίη
—the apodosis is only implied
in ἔδει
παραγενἐσθαι . M. T. 696. ἢν προχωρῇ might have been kept.
προχωρεῖν is a favourite word with Thuc.
ἅμα
—belongs to
ῥηθείσης, as c.
4
ὑετοῦ ἅμα ἐπιγενομένου.
ῥηθείσης
—more
usually ἐλθούσης, but the former
is better suited to a hurried announcement to an army on the march.
τῶν γεγενημένων
—the Theban
reinforcements were ignorant of the destruction of their friends
when they arrived, see 4 below. Hence these τὰ
γεγενημένα told them were not complete. The message was
doubtless brought by those who escaped κατὰ
πύλας ἐρήμους, who did not know all.
ἐπεβοήθουν
—‘increased their speed.’ Cf. III. 110,
1.
ἑβδομήκοντα
—probably
rather over the direct route, but approximately correct measured
by
the road.
γενόμενον
—of natural phenomena, as
often. Cf. c.
77
ἐγένετο
φλόξ, ὕδωρ καὶ βροντὰς
γενομένας. ἐρρύη μέγας
—cf.
c.
75
ᾔρετο
μέγα.
τε
—‘and
so.’
ὕστερον
—‘late,’ cf. c.
80
ὕστερον
ἦλθον.
τῶν ἀνδρῶν
—apposition with τῶν μὲν ... τῶν δὲ, as in 4, 4 .
ζώντων
—predicative.
κατασκευή
—‘property,’
viz. household effects and farming implements. κατασκευὴ means anything that makes a
place habitable and worth living in. See L. and S.
οἷα
—Ionic for
ἅτε.
ἐβούλοντο εἴ τινα λάβοιεν
κ.τ.λ.
—M.
T. 695. The second protasis is not co-ordinate with the
first. In a more certain form the sentence would run ὅντινα λάβοιειν
ὑπάρχειν ἐβούλοντο ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον ἐζωγρημένων.
διαβουλευομένων
—reciprocal mid., like διαλέγομαι, διαπράττομαι. When a
compound of διὰ is not available,
the same sense is given by ἐν
ἑαυτοῖς or σφίσιν αὐτοῖς,
as IV. 25,
9 παρακελευόμενοι
ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, VIII.
76
παραινέσεις ἐποιοῦντο ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς,
sometimes by ἐν ἀλλήλοις, for
which see c.
65,
11.
ὑποτοπήσαντες
—rare and poetical, used by
Thuc. 8 times, only in aor. inf. or partic.
περὶ τοῖς ἔξω
—the dat. with περὶ gradually disappeared in Attic and
occurs but once in the orators, Isocr.
Ep.
9, 10. It is regular in Thuc. with
verbs of fearing.
ὁσίως
—when used of states, ὅσιος means in accordance with those
principles of right dealing universally recognised (jus gentium). Cf.
III. 56
ἐτιμωρησάμεθα
κατὰ τὸν πᾶσι νόμον καθεστῶτα, τὸν ἐπιόντα πολέμιον ὅσιον
εἶναι
ἀμύνέσθαι. ib. c.
58,
3. See on c.
52,
3. Eur. Hec. 788
.
σφῶν
—with
πόλιν. The position is for the sake of emphasis.
πειραθέντες
—the Attic aor. of πειρῶμαι is
ἐπειράθην, cf. c.
33,
2. But Thuc. uses also the lonic
ἐπειρασάμην in c.
44
and 85.
ἔλεγον
—interrupts the structure of οὔτε ... τε, but the irregularity is
very slight. λέγω in sense of κελεύω regularly takes infin., μὴ being the neg.
εἰ δὲ μή
—cf. I. 28
εἰ δὲ μή, καὶ αὐτοὶ
ἀναγκασθήσεσθαι ἔφασαν. The addition of ἔφασαν, suspected also by Kr. in both
places, certainly adds clearness, yet Thuc. proceeds in a quite
different way in c.
13.
But the difference in the nature of the matter of these chapters
(the one narrative, the other
reflective) may account for the difference of style.
ἀναχωρησάντων ... αὐτοῖς
—the use of the gen.
abs. in spite of the dat. following, makes the act in the partic.
more prominent, and prevents it from being a mere appendage of ἀποδώσειν. A common sacrifice of form
to sense in Herod. and Thuc. αὐτοῖς
is wrongly bracketed in the text.
ἐπομόσαι
—jusjurandum
addere. Does not occur elsewhere in Thuc.
εὐθὺς
—with
ἀποδώσειν. as the following words show.
ἤν τι ξυμβαίνωσι
—closely with γενομένων, ‘with a view to an
arrangement.’ ἢν ξυμβῶσι would be
‘if they come to an arrangement.’
δ’ οὖν
—doubtful
statements are dismissed and the narrative of facts resumed.
οὐδὲν ἀδικήσαντες
—contrast οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντες =‘guiltless.’
τὰ ἐκ τῆς χώρας ἐσεκομίσαντο
—the preposition
attracted to the verb, for
ἐν. Cf. c.
13,
2, 14, 1.
ἀπέκτειναν
—assuredly
justified as an act of reprisal, but most impolitic, as
calculated
to provoke Thebes and Sparta.
εἷς αὐτῶν ἦν
—the so-called partitive gen. is
often used thus
without
εἷς, which is
wanting in C. Cf. I. 85
εἷς τῶν ἐφόρων τότε ὤν, v. 59,
5; VIII. 39,
2.
πρὸς ὅν ἔπραξαν
—so
I. 131,
I; IV. 114,
3. This is only a variant for
πράσσειν with dat., as IV. 110,
2; v. 76,
3. But when many persons are dealt with, πράσσειν
ἐς is also used, as I.
132,
4. The same
three constructions follow
λέγειν: πρός, Andoc.
I. 48; dat.,
ib. I. 69; ἐς, ib.,
l.c.
Eur.
Hec. 303
εἷπον εἰς
ἅπαντας, ‘proposed in the general assembly.’
οἱ προδιδόντες
—see on c.
2,
4.
ἔπεμπον
—the imperf. with verbs of
‘going’ and ‘sending,’ presenting the details
of an elaborate negociation involving a journey, is common. Cf. c.
85,
2; I. 10,
5, 26, 1, and 3 below. But the aor. is also
used. M. T. 57.
καὶ
—has nothing to do with the τε preceding, which is answered by the
τε following. Thus the sentence consists of two
members joined by τε .. τε. Cf. I. 69,
1 τό τε πρῶτον ἐάσαντες . . καὶ ὔστερον
τὰ
μακρὰ
στῆσαι τείχη, ἐς τόδε τε αἰεὶ ἀποστεροῦντες. So in 4
below.
ἠγγέλθη εὐθὺς
—does not refer to ἔπεμπον ἄγγελον, but to two previous
messages mentioned in 3 below. Plataea is something over 30 miles
from Athens.
καὶ .. ξυνέλαβον
— parataxis, presenting the
two facts as almost concurrent. The second was prompt and hurried.
Cf. I.
61
ἦλθε καὶ τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις εὐθὺς ἠ ἀγγελία ... καὶ
πεμπουσιν. ἔπεμψαν
... κελεύοντες
—the
activity of the sender is continued in the person sent. Cf. c.
85,
1.
νεώτερον ποιεῖν
—
i.e.
νεωτερίζειν. Cf. I.
132,
5; IV. 55
μὴ νεώτερόν τι γένηται. πρὶν
ἂν
—after
historic tenses, πρὶν ἂν and subj.
is used only in Oratio Obliqua. Cf. c.
84,
1, 102, 5.
ἅμα τῇ ἐσόδῳ γιγνομένῃ
—see c.
2,
1.
οὕτω δὴ
— gives the result of facts just
stated, contrast c.
19,
1.
οὐκ εἰδότες
—sc.
ὅτι τεθνήκασιν. ἐπέστελλον
—see
1 above.
ἐγκατέλιπον
—so
ἐγκαθέζομαι
III. 1
; ἐγκαθίστημι
I. 4
; ἐγκαθορμίζομαι
IV. 1
; ἐγκατοικοδομεῖν
III. 18
;
ἐγκατασκήπτειν c. 47.
τοὺς ἀχρειοτάτους
— sunt ἀχρεῖοι
omnes inhabiles
militiae,
’
Pp. Cf. c.
44.
Juv. 15,
126 imbelle et inutile vulgus. For the
deeper application of ἀχρεῖος, see
c.
40,
2.
ἐξεκόμισαν
—c.
78,
3.
λελυμένων
—before the attempt on Plataea,
each side had interpreted the other's action as σπονδῶν
ξύγχυσις (I.
146
), but there
had been no open violation of the letter of the truce.
λαμπρῶς
—cf. I. 49,
7; VIII. 66,
3, 75, 2.
παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ
—the
anaphora would have been more perfect with παρεσκευάζοντο
μὲν preceding, but Thuc. often omits μέν in cases where it is not required,
though a writer more careful about symmetry would msert it: perhaps
he purposely avoids a rhetorical formula in narrative. The common
cases in Thuc. are very simple, as πολλοὶ
μὲν ... πολλοὶ
δέ,
εἰ μὲν .. εἰ δέ, ἅμα μὲν ... ἅμα δέ. Cf. I. 28
with πέμπετε;
VI. 20,
4; also c.
41,
3 μόνη γὰρ καὶ
μόνη.
μέλλοντες
—belongs
to both subjects, as ποιούμενοι
below. Probably both intended sending to Persia, though the
Athenians did not carry out their intention. See c.
67.
πέμπειν
—M. T.
73, 96.
ἀλλόσε
—see c. 29.
ἑαυτῶν
—for
σφετέρας. Cf. c.
92,
4, and see c.
3,
4.
Λακεδαιμονίοις ...
ἐπετάχθη
—i.e.
Λακεδαιμόνιοι
ἐπέταξαν. This dat. of the agent is very rare with other
parts of the pass. than perf. It occurs in I. 51
τοῖς
Κερκυραίοις οὐχ ἑωρῶντο, IV. 64
τίνες ἂν δικαιότερον πᾶσι ... μισοῖντο
, ib.
109
πόλεις
οἰκοῦνται ξυμμίκτοις ἔθνεσι. There are only two
instances in the Orators.
αὐτοῦ
—in
the harbours of Peloponnese.
ἐξ Ἰ. καὶ Σ.
—with τοῖς
ἑλομένοις, but placed first for the sake of the antithesis
with
αὐτοῦ. Cf. c.
18,
3 κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην πορείαν ἡ σχολαιότης. ναῦς
ἐπετάχθη
—Stahl
supports his reading with great ability. It will be noticed that
these Dorian cities, reckoned by Sparta among her allies, are not
mentioned in c.
9
with the
ξύμμαχοι, because there only those who actually
contributed to the armament are given, and these cities contributed
nothing. III.
86,
2.
ποιεῖσθαι
—middle,
ναῦς being the object. Cf. I. 14,
2.
ἐς τὸν πάντα ἀ
—‘in all.’ When the article precedes πᾶς, the whole is regarded as the sum
of its component parts.
πεντακοσίων
—by no means realised. The
Spartan navy in the Archidamian War was contemptible. See c.
66
and 85. Thuc. speaks with some irony.
τά τ’ ἄλλα
—perhaps
τἆλλα should be read here, the
τ’ being due to dittography.
ἡσυχάζοντας
—the change from the dat. ἑλομένοις is due to the infin. This
change from gen. or dat. is always possible except when a word is
the predicate to a gen. or dat., as I. 71
βουλομένων
ὑμῶν εἶναι προθύμων. See c 24, 1.
μιᾷ νηὶ
—si
singulis
navibus venissent; nam pluribus venientes timendum esse ne
hostiliter agerent,
Pp. This gives an example to show how
they were to refrain from hostile acts (ἡσυχάζοντας).
ἕως ἂν
— whereas with πρίν, μέχρι
and μέχρι
οὗ Thuc. occasionally omits
ἂν when subjunctive is used, according to the older
Attic idiom, this is never the case with ἕως.
Cf. c.
72,
3.
τὰ περὶ Π.
—‘in the neighbourhood of P.’ like circa. Cf. c.
99,
3.
μᾶλλον
—‘more than elsewhere,’ so
‘especially.’ Cf. c.
15
ἑτέρων μᾶλλον. Κέρκυραν
—
the places are given in inverse order, the final point reached
coming first. Cf. c.
93,
1. Eur. Bach. 13
fol. At present only an
ἐπιμαχία existed between Athens and Corcyra. See Intr.
p. LXVI.
Κεφαλληνίαν
—it took no part in the war
at first, but joined Athens towards the end of the summer. See c. 30.
Ἀκαρνᾶνας
—except
the Oeniadae, c.
102,
2, the Acarnanians were reckoned as allies from the first, though no
treaty was concluded till the autumn of 430. See c.
68. Ζάκυνθον
—its
interests and policy coincided with those of Corcyra. Cf. c.
9,
4; I. 47,
2.
εἰ ... εἴη
— Recta,
ἐὰν ... ᾖ. See 2,
4.
βεβαίως
—cf. IV. 20,
3 φίλους γενέσθαι βεβαίως. πέριξ
καταπολεμήσοντες
—se undique
impugnaturos.
ὀλίγον οὐδὲν
—cf.
VII. 59,
3, 87, 6; VIII. 15,
2.
ὀλίγον is predicate.
τε
—‘in
fact,’ summing up the preceding remarks. Cf. 3 below.
ἔρρωντο
—totis
viribus
incumbebant. Thuc. uses the
literal sense only once, VII. 15.
οὐκ ἀπεικότως
—so
εἰκότως in the Orators is often followed by γάρ. Cf. I. 77,
5. So οὐκ ἀκουσίως below.
ἀρχόμενοι
—i.e.
there is greater enthusiasm at the beginning of an undertaking than
after the first excitement has worn off.
ἀντιλαμβάνονται
— sc. τῶν πραγμάτων, rem
capessunt.
τότε δὲ
—contrasted with πάντες. καὶ
—an
additional reason existed then.
νεότης
—
juventus. Cf. c.
20,
2, 21, 2. The abstract term, like ἡλικία, represents the young men as a
power in the State. Cf. Pericles' remark, quoted by Aristot. Rhet. A. 7, 34
τὴν
νεότητα ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἀνῃρῆσθαι ὥσπερ τὸ ἔαρ ἐκ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ εἰ
ἐξαιρεθείη. ὑπ’ ἀπειρίας
—so ὑπὸ is used with any noun
denoting any state of mind which is the immediate cause of action.
See c.
47,
4. παροιμία·
γλυκὺς ἀπείρῳ πόλεμος [Pindar,
frag. 87 Bergk] Schol.
ἡ ἄλλη Ἑλλὰς
—all States in or outside Greece.
Cf. I.
1,
1,
6, 1.
ξυνιουσῶν
—pres.
not fut. Cf. v. 59,
5, 71, 1.
λόγια
—a general term for all words,
whether prose or verse, supposed to be ominous. Probably old stories
of strange things in the
past are here meant Pind Pyth. 1,
92.
ἐλέγετο
—in other places the plur. verb
appears after a neut. sing. (see not.
crit.), viz.: I. 126,
5 ἐπῆλθον
Ὀλύμπια (where CEG read
ἐπῆλθεν ); v. 75,
2 Καρνεῖα ἐτύγχανον ὄντα:
though elsewhere names of festivals have the sing.; v. 26,
2 ἁμαρτήματα ἐγένοντο; VI. 62,
4 ἐγένοντο ἑκατὸν τάλαντα . Ita rarus est hic plur, numeri usus apud
veteres
scriptores
Atticos, ut fere suspiceris librariorum errores esse e
Byzantinorum
sermone illatos,
Herw.
πολλὰ δὲ
—i.e.
χρησμοί, which are collected and
interpreted by χρησμολόγοι.
ἦδον
—contrasted with ἔλέγετο, since the χρησμοὶ were in verse; ‘recited.’ Cf.
c.
54,
2. So cano often.
Δῆλος ἐκινήθη
—the centre of the Ionian
race, which by its unique
κίνησις foreshadowed an equally unique
κίνησις of all Greece. Cf. I. 1,
2.
οὔπω
—either Thuc. did not know of Herod. VI.
98,
or he
ignores it.
ἐπὶ
—‘in view of.’ c.
36,
4.
σημῆναι
—intrans., σημεῖον
εἶναι. Cf. c.
43,
3, 49, 7.
ἀνεζητεῖτο
—cf.
VIII. 33,
4. Bloomf. quotes Aristoph. Lys. 28
πρᾶγμ’
ἀνεζητημένον, πολλαῖσιν ἀγρυπνίαισιν ἐρριπτασμένον.
ἐποίει ἐς
—ἀντὶ
τοῦ εὐνοικῶς εἶχον Schol. Mira
locutio
, says Herw. The phrase is only found here in Attic,
but is imitated by late writers.
προειπόντων
—cf. c.
5,
5; M.T. 850; and for Latin, Riemann, S.L. § 263; a convenient use of the gen.
abs., in spite of the proximity of another case, to make a fresh
predication without a new sentence. Cf. c.
83,
3; I. 114,
1; III. 13,
6, 22, 1.
ἐλευθεροῦσιν
—the claim continually put
forward by S., that she was a Liberator. She traded on the insane
craving for αὐτονομία, the evil
spirit by which the Greeks were possessed. A wanton abuse of terms
must lead to disaster, and after misusing the word Freedom for a
century, Greece ‘buried her Liberty’ on the field of Chaeronea.
καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ
—sive
... sive. There are some 50 cases of this antithesis
between λ. and ἔ. in Thuc., which is not surprising
considering that (1) great importance was attached to words at Athens, apart from their truth or
falsity; (2) Thuc. had but too good reason to contrast the
professions of men with their deeds during the war. The antithesis
underlies all diplomacy. The opening of the Funeral Oration, c.
35,
is a contrast of λόγος and ἔργον. Cf. c.
40,
1, 41, 2, 4, 42, 2, 4, 43, 1, 2, 46, 1, 65, 9, 72, 1,
81, 2.
ἐν τούτῳ ... ᾧ
—‘in any enterprise in which he did
not take part.’ ᾧ depends on
παρέσται, as in I. 22
οἷς αὐτὸς παρῆν. κεκωλῦσθαι
—i.e.
κεκώλυται εἰ
μὴ
αὐτὸς παρέσομαι, the perfect being used of something
bound to happen in the future if the condition is fulfilled. Livy XXI. 43, 2
vicimus for
vicerimus. Cf. IV.
46,
3 ὥστ’
ἐάν τις ἁλῷ ἀποδιδράσκων, ἅπασι λελύσθαι τὰς σπονδάς.
The description of the friends of Sparta is not without a touch of
sarcasm.
<ἐν> ὀργῇ εἶχον
—c.
59,
2.
ἀρχθῶσι
—ingressive,
‘become subjects.’
φοβούμενοι
—the government of Sparta kept
all its proceedings too secret for them to know the true
nature of the Spartan oligarchy, which was to conduct them in many
cases from democracy to decarchy.
παρασκευῇ ... καὶ γνώμῃ
—c.
7
and 8 are resumed by a
chiasmus (see analysis of 7, 8 ).
ὥρμηντο
—‘made ready for war.’ Cf. I. 32,
5.
Λακ, μὲν ... Πέλ. μὲν ... ἔξω δὲ Ἀθ.
δέ
—the extremes and the means are
contrasted, as usually with this double use of μὲν ... δέ.
Πελοποννήσιοι
—in
the geographical sense, the dwellers in Peloponnese of whatever
stock.
[οἱ ἐντὸς Ἰσθμοῦ
]—usually in Thucydides Πελοποννήσιοι means ‘the allies of
Sparta.’ In c.
11
indeed, Archidamus is made to address the officers as Πελ. καὶ ξύμμαχοι,
i.e. as politically connected and as comrades in arms, but,
after that it is generally taken for granted that all the allies are
included in the term Πελ. But
before the war,
Πελοποννήσιοι means ‘the inhabitants of Peloponnese,’
and only in this sense can the Argives and Achaeans be included in
the term. If οἱ
ἐντὸς is in the text, the P. of Peloponnese are
contrasted with those P. outside it (Πελοποννήσιοι
ἔξω
Πελοποννήσου), i.e.
Πελ. must mean ‘the allies of Sparta,’
which is impossible.
Πελληνῆς
—near
Zougra. Pellene seems to have been connected politically with
Sicyon
(10 miles) and Phlius (14 miles) rather than with Achaea.
ἔπειτα δὲ ὕστερον
—cf.
III. 94,
1; IV. 102,
2; v. 61,
4. In 417 the Lacedaemonians became more closely connected with
Achaea. See v. 82,
1.
ἔξω δὲ Π.
—on
the land side, Athens was wedged in between enemies. This both
exposed her to invasion and hampered her own undertakings. It
was
with a view to breaking up this hostile combination that
Demosthenes
undertook the expedition into Aetolia in 427.
Λοκροί
—the
Opuntian Locrians, with the Epicnemidian, whereas the Ozolian
Locrians were allies of Athens.
ναυτικὸν
—scarcely
anything was done by S. with the fleet in the 1st year. Intr. p.
LXXII.
Κορίνθιοι
—for their naval operations,
see c. 33, 80, 3, 83. Μεγαρῆς
—c. 92. Σικυώνιοι
—c.
80,
3.
Ἀμπρακιῶται
—c. 80. [παρεῖχον]— Intr. p. XXXIX.
αὕτη
—the omission of μὲν here and in
I.
125,
1. in both
of which C inserts μέν, raises a
difficulty. Elsewhere it is left out only when a participle prevents
its use, as in the opening of c. 65, 72, 75. It
is possible that αὕτη Λακ. ξυμμαχία
is inserted wrongly from 6 below. (This omission is not similar to
that noticed above, c.
7,
1.)
Χῖοι, Λέσβιοι
—
the only islands on the Aegean then retaining the position of
independent allies of Athens.
ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ
—placed there by Athens at
the close of the third Messenian War. See
c. 27, 2.
οἱ πλείους
—Astacus (c.
30
)
and Oeniadae (c.
102
)
did not join Athens.
ἄλλαι
—‘and other cities (besides the αὐτόνομοι ξύμμαχοι just mentioned),
namely.’
Καρία
—the
ἔθνη are added in the nom., in spite of the dat.
preceding, because these are the four financial divisions of the πόλεις ὑποτελεῖς, so that the
nominatives are as much in apposition with
πόλεις as with ἔθνεσι. Καρία ... πρόσοικοι
—called
in the tribute lists ὁ Καρικὸς φόρος,
and so Ἰωνία = ὁ
Ἰωνικός,
Ἑλλήσποντος = ὁ
Ἑλλησπόντιος,
τὰ
ἐπὶ Θ. = ὁ ἐπὶ Θ. φ.,
νῆσοι
... Θήρας = ὁ νησιωτικὸς φ.
From 436 B.C. Ionia and Caria were grouped together.
Καρσὶ πρόσοικοι
—for the omission of οἱ cf. c.
85,
5. It is explained by the fact that this is an official title, Kr. Gr. Gr. 50, 2, 11.
νῆσοι...πᾶσαι αἱ ἄλλαι
—for ὅσος Iimited by
πλήν, cf. IV. 32,
2, and for οὶ
ἄλλοι
V. 27,
2.
Μήλου καὶ Θήρας
—both
colonized by the Dorians about the time of their settlement in
Crete, circ. 1100 B.C.
ναυτικὸν
—this was a privilege belonging
only to the independent allies. Cf. Intr. p. LXXIV. They were
αὐτοτελεῖς.
ξυμμαχία
—abstract
for concrete.
καὶ παρασκευὴ
—the chapter is summarised
in inverse order, as in c. 7,
8.
ἄνδρες
—Thuc. shows exquisite judgment in
selecting the places in which to insert speeches. They are the
occasions on which it is necessary for the reader to understand the
exact situation of affairs and to realise what were the infiuences
at work. They stand in place of explanation and
abstract reasoning. The occasions selected for this purpose in this
book are (a) the first invasion of Attica
(this speech shows the feelings of the Spartans); (
b) the close of the first campaign (the Funeral Oration is an
exposition of the form and theory of the Athenian polity by the
ablest citizen); (c) the close of Pericles'
administration and life, the speech containing a vindication of his
policy; (d) the victories of Phormio, the one
event of great importance outside Athens in 429, and the most
splendid example of Athenian prowess in the whole war. Dion. Hal.
totally misunderstood the significance of the speeches. Far juster
is Lucian's estimate (πῶς δεῖ
ἱστορίαν συγγράφειν c.
44
):
he knew that Thuc.'s object was σαφῶς
δηλῶσαι
καὶ φανώτατα ἐμφανίσαι τὰ πράγματα.
[οἱ
] —inserted through
confusion with οἱ πατέρες. Thuc. never
puts in the article in such addresses.
ξύμμαχοι
—there are two elements in the
force, but Archidamus groups them together, and carefully draws no
distinctions. ἄνδρες goes with ξύμμαχοι also.
καὶ οἱ π. . καὶ αὐτῶν
—paratactic,
the 2nd member being the more prominent.
οἱ πατέρες
—an
opportune reference to the wars which were the glory of the
Dorian
race. Thuc. however avoids any commonplaces about the Persian
wars
such as become frequent in later writers.
στρατείας ἐποιήσαντο
— = ἐστράτευσαν. ἡμῶν οἱ
πρεσβύτεροι εἰσίν
—with
the ‘partitive’ genitive 1st or 2nd person, the verb is generally in
3rd person, but the writer always passes quickly to the 1st or 2nd.
Cf. III. 62
σκέψασθε ἐν οἵῳ εἴδει
ἑκάτεροι ἡμῶν τοῦτο ἔπραξαν.
VII. 64
ἐνθυμεῖσθε ὅτι οἱ ἐν ταῖς
ναυσὶν ὑμῶν νῦν ἐσόμενοι καὶ πεζοὶ τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις εἰσὶ καὶ
νῆες. So I. 87.
When for the subject a relative clause is substituted, the 3rd
person is rare: e.g.
Andoc.
I. 46
ὁπόσοι ὐμῶν παρῆσαν (= οἱ παρόντες)
ἀναμιμνήσκεσθε. Lys. 12, 97 , Aeschin. 3, 60. The same phenomenon may
be seen in Latin poets, as Ov.
Trist.III. 4, 75
et
qua
quisque
potest aliqua mala nostra levate.
μείζονα
—litotes, as
πλεῖστοι shows.
νῦν ἐρχόμεθα
—sc.
ἡμεῖς, whereas οἱ πατέρες
καὶ
οἱ
πρεσβύτεροι was subject to
ἐξήλθομεν. στρατεύοντες
—sc. ἐρχόμεθα, the antithesis
being between πόλιν and αὐτοί,
δυνατωτάτην and πλεῖστοι καὶ
ἄριστοι στρατεύοντες.
δίκαιον οὖν
—the topic is τὸ καλόν, as in 9 below. Index s. v.
τόποι.
It is a common subject in Thuc., especially in military harangues.
ἡμῶν αὐτῶν
—put first for the sake of the
antithesis. See c.
7,
2.
ἐπῆρται
—cf. Dem.
4,
49
τοῖς πεπραγμένοις ἐπῃρμένον. εὔνοιαν
ἔχουσα
—with
infin. = ἐπιθυμοῦσα, as c.
86,
5 γνώμην
εἶχον μὴ ἐκπλεῖν. A periphrasis for a simple verb is
very common in Tragedy.
οὔκουν χρὴ
—the topic of the πίστις is τὸ
ξυμφέρον, as the Schol. says. It is the commonest of all
forms of argument in Thuc.
πλήθει
—of superior numbers, as c.
89,
1.
ἀσφάλεια πολλὴ
—opposite of κίνδυνος μέγας, but, being an abstract
idea, and not, like κίνδυνος, a
single entity, it requires
πολλή. Cf. VI.
24.
So with προθυμία,
ἀθυμία and such words.
εἶναι
—sc.
δοκεῖ. μὴ ἄν ἐλθεῖν
—after
the predicative noun ἀσφάλεια,
like κίνδυνος, ξυγγνωμή. διὰ μάχης ἰέναι
—cf.
6 below; IV. 92,
1. So διὰ δίκης ἰέναι
VI.
60,
3; δῑ ὄχλου εἶναι
I. 73,
2; διὰ
φόβου εἶναι
VI.
59,
2; δῑ ησυχίας ἔχειν c.
22,
1.
ἀμελέστερόν τι
—cf. 9 below πλέον τι. By the addition of τι the range of the adjective is
indefinitely extended.
τὸ καθ’ αὑτὸν
—suam
quemque vicem. Cf. c.
87,
8. The subject of ἥξειν is ἡγεμόνα καὶ ς.
ἄδηλα γὰρ
—Thuc. is extremely fond of γνῶμαι or general truths as arguments,
whereas he does not use
παραδείγματα or examples at all. The
γνῶμαι have been collected by several critics, and, as
might be supposed, they show a profound insight into the fundamental
principles that actually guide human conduct.
ἐξ ὀλίγου
—‘suddenly.’
δῑ ὀργῆς
—
‘on impulse.’
αἱ ἐπιχειρήσεις γίγνονται
—the passive of τὰς ἐπι. ποιεῖσθαι
I. 70,
7.
τε
—adds
a third and important fact. [
δεδιὸς ἄμεινον
]—
-
1.
δεδιὸς
obscures the point, which is that a large force, caught off its
guard, has often been defeated by a small force. There is no room
here for any reference to the apprehension or precautions of the
smaller force.
-
2. No passage supports the idea that
Archidamus is pointing out the advantage of
δέος
in
action,
ἐν τῷ ἀμύνεσθαι.
It is then too late for δέος,
which is valuable only ἐν τῷ
παρασκευάζεσθαι .
-
3. The assumption that δεδιὸς is answered by διὰ τὸ καταφρονοῦντας ... γενέσθαι
is not borne out by the form of the sentence.
-
4. Archidamus merely says ‘do not be
careless, lest you be caught unprepared.’ 5. Of ἄμεινον there are two
explanations
- (
a) = ἄμεινον
ἢ οἱ
πλείονες τὸ ἔλασσον πλῆθος. But ἠμύναντο is used only
of the side on the defensive; nor is there any reference to
superiority in courage such as ἀγαθός
suggests.
- (
b) ἄμεινον
δεδιὸς ἢ μὴ
δεδιός, Cl., a curious paradox worthy
only of a rhetorician.
Append.
II.
ἠμύνατο
—gnomic. Cf. c.
89
πολλὰ
στρατόπεδα ἤδη ἔπεσεν ὑπὸ ἐλασσόνων.
χρὴ δὲ
—a
γνώμη in the form of an
antithesis. For ‘figures’ in
γνῶμαι, cf. c.
40
throughout.
τῇ μὲν γνώμῃ ... τῷ δὲ ἔργῳ
—an imperfect antithesis. γνώμη means ‘feelings,’ ἔργον ‘actions’ (not γνώμη ‘plans,’
ἔργον ‘battle’). Cf. c.
43,
3, 64. 6, and 89
τῆ δυνάμει τὸ πλέον πίσυνοι ἢ
τῆ? γνωμη?. Herod. VII. 49 ἀνὴρ
οὕτω ἄν εἴη
ἄριστος εἰ βουλευόμενος μὲν ἀρρωδέοι ἐν δὲ τῷ ἔργῳ θρασὺς
εἴη—which is however somewhat different.
παρασκευάζεσθαι
—the reading is now
commonly παρεσκευάσθαι. Cr. says
‘le parfait est nécessaire,’ but gives the present. The perfect is
due to a mistaken interpretation of γνώμῃ
and
ἔργῳ , the latter of which refers to
the period before battle. The antithesis
between στρατεύειν and παρασκευάζεσθαι must not be too closely
pressed. (A quite different view of this passage will be found in
Steup, Quaest. Thuc. p. 30.)
πρὸς τὸ ἐπιέναι εὐψυχότατοι
—cf. III. 44,
3 ξυμφέρον
πρὸς τὸ ἧσσον ἀφίστασθαι; VIII.
76,
6. The use
of the infinitive with article in all constructions is far commoner
in the speeches and the passages in the rhetorical manner than in
ordinary narrative.
ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι
—‘to be attacked.’ This
sentence puts in the proper light the two points referred to in 3
above: so πλήθει ἐπιέναι
has become εὐψυχότατοι
ἐπιέναι
, ἀσφάλεια μὴ ἂν
ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι
has become ἀσφάλεια
πρὸς
τὸ ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι
. εὐψυχότατοι
ἐπιέναι
results from τὸ
θαρσαλέους στρατεύειν
, ἀσφάλεια
πρὸς
τὸ
ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι
from τὸ δεδιότας
παρασκευάζεσθαι
.
οὕτω
—with
ἀδύνατον. τοῖς πᾶσι
—cf.
c.
36,
3.
εἰ μὴ καὶ νῦν
—‘if not already ... at least.’ I
see no need to alter the text with Francken, or to assume a
misplacement of καί. For ἀλλά, ἀλλὰ ... γέ, ἀλλ’
οὖν ... γε, see Kr. Gr. Gr. 69,
4, 5.
ὅταν ὁρῶσι
—usually in Thuc. ὅταν denotes a single act, ὁπόταν repeated action. I. 142,
9 is an exception.
τἀκείνων
—for τὰ
ἑαυτῶν, as ἐκεῖνος can
apply to anyone other than the speaker and the person addressed.
φθείροντας
— cf. Livy
XXII. 3
Flaminius postquam res
sociorum
ante oculos prope suos
agi ferrique vidit
.
πᾶσι γὰρ
—the only possible way of taking
these words as they stand is the traditional way of Arn., Shil., and
Bh., which is supported by A. Grossman, N. Jahrb.
121, p. 523. ἐν
τοῖς ὄμμασι καὶ ἐν τῷ παραυτίκα are taken after ὁρᾶν, the infinitive is made to depend
on the phrase ὀργὴ προσπίπτει, as
though it were
λυπεῖ, and ὁρᾶν πάσχοντας
= ‘to see that they are suffering.’ There are grave objections: ὁρᾶν
πάσχοντας would more naturally mean ‘to see others suffering,’ and it is very doubtful
whether ὀργὴ προσπίπτει can be
considered a periphrasis which could legitimately take an infinitive
in prose. Usener proposes πᾶσι
γὰρ ἐν τῷ
παραυτίκα
ὁρᾶν
πάσχοντάς τι ἀηθές, taking ἐν
τῷ with ὁρᾶν πάσχοντας.
Cf. Steup's proposal in not. crit.
γὰρ
—this introduces the γνώμη by which the statement that ‘the
Athenians will come out to battle’ is supported. We have here an
example of the form of proof called Enthymeme,
i.e. a ‘syllogism drawn, not from the premisses proper to
any particular science—such, for instance, as medicine—but from
propositions relating to contingent things in the sphere of human
action, which are the common property of all discussion.’ Jebb, Attic
Orators II. p. 289. Cf. c. 60. καὶ λογισμῷ
—i.e. ‘and then men do not pause to think.’
Possibly οἱ bracketed represents a
lost οἱ
τοιοῦτοι, = οἱ ὀργισθέντες. θυμῷ
—also,
like λογισμῷ, with χρώμενοι .
Ἀθηναίους
—this view of Athenian
character is that of Thuc. himself. He began the description of it
in the first speech of the Corinthian envoy at Sparta (I. 70
)
and completes it in the Funeral Oration (c.
35
fol.).
πλέον τι
—cf. III. 45,
6, 69, 2; IV.
78,
5; V. 29,
2; VI. 90,
1; VII. 21,
4, 49, 4. For τι
with comparative, see 3 above. μᾶλλόν τι is commoner in this sense.
τῶν ἄλλων
—often
ἑτέρων in this idiom.
εἰκὸς
—decet,
with aorist infinitive, as regularly (sometimes present, c.
10,
1). Rutherford, Syntax, p. 128. The argument
is now drawn from τὸ εἰκός. An
orator naturally employs this topic to prove something in the past,
but Thuc. to forecast the future. Index
s.v.
τόποι. τοῦτο
δρᾶσαι
—the regular
phrase for referring to an action just deseribed. Cf. c.
49,
5; I. 5,
2, 6, 5. Of course Thuc. refers to the actual
indignation of the Athenians at seeing their land ravaged. See c.
21,
2. It was a source of great pride that the beautiful country of
Attica had never been plundered πλὴν τὰ
Μηδικά. Cf. Eur.
Med. 826—the play was produced this very year— where the
Athenians are addressed as ἱερᾶς χώρας
ἀπορθήτου τ’ ἀποφερβόμενοι. ὁρᾶν
—sc.
δῃουμένην.
δόξαν ἐπ’ ἀμφότερα—καὶ εὐκλείας καὶ δυσκλείας
Schol.
οἰσόμενοι
—cf. c.
60
αἰτίαν φέρεσθαι. τοῖς
προγόνοις
—we should refer to
posterity, but the ancients thought far more of the worship due
to their ancestors, the θεοὶ χθόνιοι.
On the excessive reverence of the Greeks for the past (from which
Thuc. was remarkably free), Girard, Essai
sur
Thuc., p. 13, says ‘Les Grecs ne songeaient qu'aà chercher
dans cet âge merveilleux leurs titres de noblesse et à y rettacher
étroitement le présent.’
ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς
—corrected from ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς with Hude, Comment. Crit., p. 109.
ἕπεσθε strongly supports him. ‘Nulla in re magis quam
in pronominibus ἡμεῖς et ὑμεῖς permutandis librarios peccavisse
satis constat.’
ἀποβαινόντων
—see c.
50,
2.
ὄξεως δεχόμενοι
—cf. c.
89,
9.
κάλλιστον καὶ
ἀσφαλέστατον
—the identity of τὸ καλὸν and τὸ
ἀσφαλὲς has been the prevailing idea throughout the
speech. It is an idea characteristic of Sparta that εὐνομία is
κάλλος. Thus Spartan tradition did not object to Athens
claiming the poet Tyrtaeus for her own, though the claim was
probably unfounded; but took care that the lame Athenian singer
should only develop into the warrior Tyrtaeus after settling in
Sparta.
ὄντας
—the participle adds emphasis to πολλοὺς and heightens the contrast to
ἑνί.
τοσαῦτα
—haec
tantum, the regular word after a short speech instead of τοιαῦτα. εἴ τι
ἄρα
—c. 5,
1.
τι μᾶλλον
—not for μᾶλλόν
τι, but τι belongs
to
ἐνδοῖεν, as below, οὐδὲν
ἐνδωσείουσι.
οὐδ’
—οὐδέ,
μηδέ, sometimes as here = nedum
‘much less.’
τὸ κοινὸν
—the
βουλὴ and ἐκκλησία. ἦν ...
νενικηκυῖα
—except with this periphrasis in the perfect passive and middle
forms, the tense of εἰμὶ must
precede the participle, and is emphatic, representing a state of
things existing at the time referred to, Cf. c.
67
ἦν ...
πολιορκοῦν, 80
ἦσαν ...
ξυμπροθυμούμενοι, 93
ἦν
προφυλάσσον. Then the participle often resembles an
adjective.
κήρυκα ... προσδέχεσθαι
—a formal expression
for breaking off all political relations. Cf. V,
80. .
ἐκτὸς ὅρων
—without article, as a local expression, akin to ἐν ἄστει. Rutherford,
Syntax, p. 4.
τὸ λοιπὸν
— with
πρεσβεύεσθαι.
ἀναχωρήσαντας
—i.e. retire before thinking of sending any
more. The participle is emphatic.
διαλύσεσθαι
—‘part
from his escort.’
τοσόνδε
—
‘merely this.’
ὅτι
—this convenient form of
quasi-oblique speech, where the speaker's actual words follow ὅτι, is colloquial and limited to
prose.
ἥδε ἡ ἡμέρα
—Aristoph.
Pax 435 εὐχόμεσθα
τὴν νῦν ἡμέραν
Ἕλλησιν ἄρξαι πᾶσι πολλῶν κἀγαθῶν.
Verg. Aen. IV. 169
ille dies primus leti, primusque
malorum
causa
fuit.
ἔγνω
—ingressive,
‘learnt.’
ἐνδωσείουσι
—though Cobet and Sta. reject
this, it is more probable than
ἐνδώσουσι, since πω
is not used with future, and Archidamus' object was to find out what
the Athenians were now intending.
οὕτω δὴ
—like τότε
δή, gives the decisive moment. Cf. c.
19.
μέρος
—of infantry. So the Boeotians did
not supply cavalry only. See c.
9,
3.
λειπομένοις
—for the present, see c.
2,
4.
ἐν ὁδῷ ὄντων
—cf. c.
12, 1 and 2, but referring here to the march not of the
various contingents to the Isthmus, but of the whole force from the
Isthmus. Several meetings of the Ecclesia were held.
Περικλῆς
—O. Drefke, de
orat. quae in priore parte Historiae Thuc. insunt,
suggests that Thuc. probably intended to insert a speech here, but
changed his mind on finding the subject unsuitable for readers. He
thinks that we have here the notes Thuc. had made at the time, which
assumption would explain the loose structure of the Oratio
Obliqua throughout. Cf. c. 72. δέκατος
αὐτὸς
—the
view of Gilbert, that this phrase means that Pericles was στρατηγὸς αὐτοκράτωρ,
i.e. was irresponsible and had full powers to do anything he
deemed necessary, is now generally accepted. Pericles held the same
position in the war with Samos 440 B.C.
μὴ πολλάκις
—as though ὑποτοπήσας were
φοβηθείς. Cf. III.
53,
2 ὑποπτεύομεν μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε.
πολλάκις
—
forte, a sense which it bears only after εἰ, ἐάν, μή. μὴ δηώσῃ
—should
be οὐ
δηώσῃ. This very rare irregularity is
only possible when the second negative is far removed from the
first. M. T. 306.
ἐπὶ διαβολῇ
—the same thing was done by
Hannibal to cast odium on Fabius, Livy,
xxii. 23, 4. For the order, see c 2,
2.
τοῦτο γένηται
—c.
11,
8.
προηγόρευε
—above
προεῖπον. The rule about compounds of λέγω and
ἀγορεύω will be found in Rutherford's New
Phryn. p. 326.
οἱ
—the only form of the indirect
reflexive singular found in Thuc. and the
orators, and rare in them.
ἐπὶ κακῷ
—the same phrase in V. 44,
3, 77, 6; VIII. 58,
3, 4.
γένοιτο
—sc.
τοῦτο, as γένηται
τοῦτο above.
τοὺς ἀγροὺς καὶ οἰκίας
—the article not repeated,
the two nouns forming one idea between them (viz. the idea τὴν φανερὰν οὐσίαν). Cf. c.
10,
3.
ἀφίησιν
—does not depend on προηγόρευε, but is used for άφιέναι
φησίν (which is possibly what
Thuc. wrote), just as we might say ‘he gives the land’ for ‘he
undertakes to give it.’
εἶναι
—like the use of εἶναι in Homer and Herod., expressing
purpose, but redundant. M. T. 774.
γίγνεσθαι
—this is like the use of the
infinitive in the terms of a treaty or any compact. It is in origin
probably identical with the so-called infinitive for imperative. But
this may be oblique for μηδεμία μοι ὑποψία γιγνέσθω. In any
case, Pp.'s explanation, supplying
βούλεται, is without doubt wrong. The sentence is
probably a note Thuc. wrote in these very words at the time.
παρῄνει δὲ
—cf. V. 38,
2 παρῄνουν γενέσθαι ὅρκους. καὶ
πρότερον
—I. 143. τὰ ἐκ τῶν ἀ.
ἐσκομίζεσθαι
—cf. c.
5,
7.
ἔς τε μάχην
—the ancient critics noticed
that polysyndeton is common in Thuc. There
are three main members here, each introduced by τε, παρασκευάζεσθαί τε ...
ἔς τε ... τά τε, and the first two are complicated by
an additional member, which however does not affect the main
structure, viz. καὶ ... ἐσκομίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ
ἐξαρτύεσθαι. μὴ ἐπεξιέναι
—Intr.
p. lxix.
τὴν πόλιν ἐσελθόντας φυλάσσειν
— cf
IV. 70
τὴν πόλιν
ἐσελθὼν βεβαιώσασθαι. When a participle and verb which
have different constructions take a common object, the object
regularly follows the construction required by the participle, as in I. 114,
2 ἐς Ἐλευσῖνα καὶ Θριῶζε ἐσβαλόντες
ἐδῄωσαν , IV 18
δοῦναι
ἐφ’ ἂ άφιγμένοι ὑμᾶς αἰτούμεθα,
VII. 3,
4 μέρος τι πέμψας πρὸς τὸ
φρούριον αἱρεῖ, ib.
53, 2 προσπεσόντες τοῖς πρώτοις
τρέπουσι. But there is here no need to take τὴν πόλιν with
ἐσελθόντας at all.
διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν
— the opposite of ἀνιέναι, I 76
ἀρχὴν ἀνιέναι. So
Livy XXI. 35, 9
in manu habere
.
χεὶρ means ‘control.’ Eur. Hec. 986. Cf. the
legal sense of manus. See
also c.
76,
4.
λέγων ... εἶναι
—a rare construction—c. 57, 1. ἀπὸ
τούτων εἶναι τῶν χρ. τῆς
προσόδου
—i.e.
τὴν ἰσχὺν
τῆς προσόδου τῶν χρημάτων ἀπὸ τούτων ( = τῶν
ξυμμάχων) εἶναι. Cf. III. 13,
6 ἔστι τῶν χρημάτων
άπὸ τῶν ξυμμάχων ἡ πρόσοδος. This sentence must not be pruned, for τῆς
προσόδου defines the nature of
ἰσχύν, and τῶν χρημάτων
is caught up presently by χρημάτων
again: the insertion of τῶν χρημάτων
is stylistic.
τὰ πολλὰ .. κρατεῖσθαι
—‘most
successes are won.’
γνώμῃ
—‘insight,’ not put in at
hap-hazard, but summing up in a word
παρασκευάζεσθαι to
ἐξαρτύεσθαι. It is on the policy here sketched that
Pericles rested his claims to be possessed of γνώμη, or, as Thuc. says in c.
65
πρόνοια. To supply
γνώμη was the statesman's part, to supply χρήματα the subjects'.
ἑξακοσίων
—in I. 96
we see that under Aristides' administration the
φόρος amounted to 460 talents. In the lists of the
quota paid to Athene for 450 and 446 B.C., the tribute of some
States is seen to be reduced, and the total was probably made up by
payments from new subjects. But the tribute was in some cases
subsequently raised, so that 600 talents may represent the average (ὡς ἐ τὶ
τὸ πολὺ) in 431.
φόρου
—for this genitive of material, cf. ἀργυρίου below. See Rutherford, Syntax, p. 35.
ἀπὸ τῶν ξυμ
—the
origin (ἀπὸ) from which
money is obtained. Cf. Aristoph. Vesp. 670
δωροδοκοῦσιν
ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων (rightly defended by Sobolewski, de praepos. usu Aristoph.).
ἄνευ
—this is the ordinary meaning of χωρὶς as a preposition in Attic, but
Thuc. only uses χωρὶς as an
adverb. The opposite of
σὺν (τοῖς) θεοῖς (see c.
2,
1) is
ἄνευ (τῶν) θεῶν. The opposite of σὺν in its other Attic sense in totals,
is usually χωρίς. The opposite of μετά is ἄνευ,
and more
rarely
χωρίς (thus
Isocrates has two cases, but in both
χωρίς, not ἄνευ, is
used to avoid hiatus).
τῆς ἄλλης προσόδου
—as
rents from public lands, especially the silver mines, the tax
paid
by resident aliens and by owners of slaves, duties on imports
exports and sales, and court fees and fines, amounting in all to
at
least 400 talents.
ἐν τῇ ἀκροπόλει
—
in the Opisthodomus of the Parthenon.
ἐγένετο
—‘amounted to.’ Cf. c.
20,
4.
τὰ προπύλαια
—begun
437, completed 432.
τἆλλα
—the
Odeum, Parthenon and the sculpture on the buildings was paid for
out
of this fund.
ἐς Ποτείδαιαν
—from first to last the
siege cost 2000 talents. It began in the autumn of 433, ended in the
winter of 430. Probably Thuc. omits in that sum the expense of
Hagnon's expedition (c.
58
),
which cost 400 talents more.
Χωρὶς
—‘besides.’ Cf. c. 24,
31, 97. χρυσίου
—
depends on ταλάντων below.
ὅσα
—sc.
ἐστί. So c.
9,
4, 97 περί
—‘used
in.’
σκῦλα Μηδικὰ
—sc. ὅσα
ἐστί, but this might have been ἐν
σκύλοις
Μηδικοῖς. The throne of Xerxes and the sabre of
Mardonius (Medus acinaces) were among them.
οὐκ ἔλασσον ἢ π. ταλάντων
—cf.
IV. 72
παρόντος
τοῦ στρατεύματος, ὁπλιτῶν οὐκ ἔλασσον ἑξακισχιλίων.
The genitive of comparison does not follow ἔλασσον here, because ταλάντων is
already in the genitive absolute, sc. ὑπαρχόντων from above.
Τὰ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων ἱερῶν
—i.e. in
temples other than the Parthenon. The temple treasures were of great
value.
χρήματα
—no
doubt Pericles explained the details, whieh he must have known
thoroughly after his long tenure of the Generalship, in which he
had
distinguished himself in Finauce. In this respect he was
imitated by
many popular leaders who followed him, and, as the war went on,
Finance became the most pressing difficulty.
οἷς χρήσεσθαι
—cf. c.
102
λέγεται
... ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι. This attraction of short relative
clauses in Oratio Obliqua into infinitive is
less rare in Greek than in Latin (of course qui = et is etc. is
different). Thuc. has nine instances.
τῆς θεοῦ
—i.e.
the statue of Athene. Both in Greek and Latin the name of the person
represented is used for the statue itself, as Victoria
aurea.
σταθμὸν
—predicate.
χρυσίου ἀ.
—with
τάλαντα. ἀπέφθου
—i.e. without alloy.
περιαιρετὸν εἶναι
—sc. ἔφη. μὴ ἐλάσσω
—
often during the war money was borrowed from the ἱερὰ
χρήματα. The loans were repaid with interest at a low
rate, which Pericles probably proposed at this time.
Τρισχιλίους καὶ μ.
—cf. c.
31,
2. 10,000 were on the spot, 3000 at Potidaea.
τῶν ἐν τοῖς φρουρίοις
—the garrisons of Attica
were supplied mainly from the
περίπολοι, young Athenians between 18 and 20 years
old. At 18 their age was entered in the ληξιαρχικὸν
γραμματεῖον, list of the members of the deme capable of
arms kept by the demarch. Not till 20 was a man entitled to attend
the Ecclesia. The περίπολοι
regularly served in Attica.
ἔπαλξιν
—eollective. See c.
4,
2. Again the article dropped with a word approximating to a proper
name, in prepositional phrases. The line of fortified walls of
Athens and Piraeus, including the long walls, is meant. The citizens
who manned these were drawn from the
πρεσβύτατοι, those excused by age from serving outside
Attica. Legally this age was 60, but in practice it could be, and
probably was, reduced.
νεωτάτων
—the
περίπολοι.
Τοῦ Φαληρικοῦ
—begun under Themistocles
with τὸ ἔξωθεν (τεῖχος), which ran to Piraeus. Under
Pericles, about 445, a third wall, τὸ
διὰ μέσου was built between these two, running to
Munychia.
ἦσαν
—were,
according to Pericles' narrative.
τὸν κύκλον τοῦ ἄστεως
—the
walls of Athens.
ἀφύλακτον ἦν
—about
6 stadia: so that the city walls, as rebuilt after Salamis, were
about 50 stadia in circumference.
τοῦ τε μακροῦ
= τοῦ
ἔξωθεν. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη
—namely τὸ ἔξωθεν, the earlier
wall, and τὸ
διὰ μέσου τεῖχος, called τὰ
σκέλη .
σταδίων
—genitive of description, almost
confined to expressions of magnitude. Cf. c.
23,
3.
Ξὺν ἱπποτοξόταις
—
including (ξὺν) the 200
mounted archers, state slaves who served as police, as did the 1200 Σκύθαι who are included in the 1600 τοξόται below.
τριήρεις τὰς π.
—see c.
2,
2.
τριακοσίους
—in
III. 17
we read that 250 ships were employed on active service at the
beginning of the war. (As the details there given do not correspond
with those given in this book with regard to the fleet in 431, the
text is probably wrong in III.
17.
)
Ἐς ἀπόδειξιν τοῦ περιέσεσθαι
—cf. c.
56
ἐς ἐλπίδα
ἦλθον τοῦ ἑλεῖν, and for the rare future infinitive
with article, I. 144,
1.
τῷ πολέμῳ
—the dative is temporal. Cf. c.
20
ἐκείνῃ
τῇ ἐσβολῆ?. It is however rarely that ἐν is omitted with a noun used
temporally which is not properly temporal.
Ἐπὶ γὰρ
—now
follows one of the few episodes in Thuc., who never leaves his
subject except to comment on some epoch of Athenian history
either
throwing light on the circumstances he is relating, or
imperfectly
understood in his day.
κατὰ πόλεις
—cf. the condition of Sparta,
referred to I. 10,
2. According to tradition, there were 12
πόλεις in Attica; these had arisen by the increase and
amalgamation of κῶμαι.
ᾠκεῖτο
—of the
political condition of the district, as often.
πρυτανεῖα
—these bore the same relation
to the community as the
οίκία did to the family. Hence the community
entertained its guests there.
ἄρχοντας
—‘princes,’
some of whose names may have been immortalised in the names of
Attic
demes.
οὐ ξυνῇσαν
—only
common danger brought them together.
ἐπολέμησαν
—the war between Athens and
Eleusis, given as an example of the early wars in Attica, was
probably due to a quarrel about the frontier, which was the range of
Mount Aegaleos, over which the Sacred Way after wards
ran. Whatever the result, the position of Athens in the Dodecapolis
was certainly raised by the war.
Θησεὺς
—probably the legend of the coming
of Theseus to Athens represents a second Ionic invasion of Attica,
to which the strife between Athene and Poseidon, who is identical
with Aegeus, father of Theseus, also points. See Plut. Thes. c. 13.
ἐβασίλευσε
—‘became king.’ Cf. c.
58
νοσῆσαι, ‘to fall sick.’
μετὰ τοῦ ξυνετοῦ
—i.e.
uniting power to the ability which he had already.
καταλύσας ... ἀποδείξας
... ξυνῴκισε
—the first participle
precedes the second in time, and the second gives the action which
resulted immediately in that of the main verb. Cf. c.
76
ἀρτήσαντες
... ἀνελκύσαντες ἀφίεσαν, 93
ἀφικομένους ... καθελκύσαντας πλεῦσαι. ξυντελούντων
—‘contributed
to it,’ in taxes, hence ‘were members of the community.’
ξυνοίκια
—neuter plural, the annual
festival celebrating the Union, held on the 16th of Hecatombaeon.
Plut. Thes. c. 24.
ποιοῦσιν
—active not middle, of the body
appointing the festival, cf. c.
34,
5.
Ἡ ἀκρόπολις
—i.e.
ἣ ἀκρόπολις νῦν
ἐστι
πόλις ἦν, the city was a mere stronghold. ‘What is now
the acropolis, and the ground lying under it to the south was the
city’ (J.). (The bracked ἡ would
imply a contrast with some older acropolis.) The same observation is
true of London and Paris.
πρὸς τετραμμένον
—here in its literal
sense, but oftener metaphorical, as in c.
25,
2; Plat.
Phaedo, p. 66 D.
Τεκμήριον δέ
—Thuc. disregards the
Athenian legends, as suited only to poetry. Deposing the picturesque
and enthroning the reasonable, he judges the remote past solely hy
the indisputable evidence supplied by the present. For the use of τεκμήρια and
σημεῖα, non-forensic πίστεις
like
ἐνθυμήματα (c.
11,
8) and
γνῶμαι (c.
11,
9), cf. 39, 2, 41, 2, 50, 2.
καὶ ἄλλων
—the lost allusion to the most
ancient temple of Athene, namely the shrine of Athene Polias
attached to the Erectheum and containing the venerable wooden figure
of the goddess (
ξόανον) and occupying the site of her struggle with
Poseidon, would have been the best evidence that the original site
of the city was the Acropolis.
τὰ ἔξω
—the early temples not on the
Acropolis lie at the south of it, viz. the Olympieium at the S.E.,
begun by Pisistratus, remarkable for its size, and only finished
under Hadrian; the Pythium, or temple of Apollo πατρῷος, of which there are no remains,
Pausanias says it was close to the Olympieium; the shrine of the
Earth-Mother, situated within the τέμενος
of the Olympieium; and that of Dionysus in the low ground near the
Ilissus. The Pisistratids probably did much to make these temples
popular.
τὰ ἀρχαιότερα
—the Anthesteria, held in Anthesterion (11th to 13th). The first day was called ἡ Πιθοιγία, the second Χόες, the third
Χύτροι. Aristoph. Ran. 215, Eur. I.
T. 960, Harpoc. and Suidas s.v.
χόες. [
τῇ δωδεκάτῃ
]—gives one day only, and
with it Ἀνθεστηριῶνος
μηνός would be required. The date of the χόες seems inserted from the same
source from which Harpocration drew.
ποιεῖται
—passive of
ποιοῦσι, not of ποιοῦνται.
See 2 above, and c.
11,
4.
οἱ ἀπ’ Ἀ.
—i.e.
οἱ ἄποικοι τῶν Ἀθηναίων.
νομίζουσι
—‘are
accustomed to do.’ Cf. 5 below, c.
38,
1.
Τῇ κρήνῃ
—S.
of the Olympieium, on the Ilissus. The Pisistratids furnished it
with nine pipes and beautified it with columns. It was part of
the
Tyrants' policy to improve their cities and to encourage every
form
of art.
Καλλιρρόῃ
—the name still survives to
show the early importance of this spring. See Ruskin, Oxford Lect.
on Art, p. 136, Pausanias, I. 14, 1. [
τὰ πλείστου ἄξια
]—Thuc. is arguing that in
earlier times the spring was in
general use.
πρὸ γαμικῶν
— for the λουτρὸν γαμικόν, the water being
brought from the spring by a maid called ἡ
λουτροφόρος. Pollux III. 43, VIII. 66. But Harpoc. says
that a boy brought it.
ἐς
ἄλλα—ἔθος ἦν καὶ τῶν ἀγάμων ἀποθανόντων λουτροφόρον ἐπὶ
τὸ μνῆμα ἐφίστασθαι Harpoc. Cf. Dem. in
Leoch. 18, 30. Probably a figure holding a pitcher, which
contained water from the spring, was placed on the tomb. Eustathius
says the object was to show that the dead had never used the nuptial
water.
νομίζεται
—‘it is the custom.’ The
connection between the λουτρὸν
γαμικὸν and the λουτρὸν
τῶν
ἀποθανόντων is as familiar as utraque
taeda. In Eur.
Hec. 612, the bringing of the water to wash the
dead body of Polyxena snggests to Hecuba the λουτρὸν
γαμικόν.
Κατοίκησιν
—c.
102,
5.
πόλις
—this
meaning is common in Inscriptions and official documents.
*(γπῆρχον
—‘had homes ready to receive
them.’ It appears that the whole of the country population was
opposed to war. The rich landed gentry had town houses, but rarely
lived in them and felt the loss of their fine country places. Cf. c. 65; Isocr. VII. 52. The farmers and peasants
were ruined by the invasion. Cf. [Lys.] 20. 33.
Ἐλευσινίου
—
at the foot of the Acropolis, at the N.E. It was regarded with
great
awe, and even in the time of Pausanias some mysterious sanctity
belonged to it. The Boule sat there the day after the Eleusinian
Festival ended.
τὸ Πελαργικὸν
—(a)
a fortification built by the ‘Pelasgians’ on the W. side of the
Acropolis, the only side accessible to an enemy; (
b) a space below this fortification and also above it. It is to
this space on either side that the curse attached. (On the
orthography, Herodian says, Πελαργικὸν
ἀντὶ τοῦ Πελασγικόν. Cf Lobeck,
Phryn. p. 109.
ἐπάρατον
—what was the reason of this?
Only the W. side was ‘cursed’ since only on that side could
buildings be placed; but this space was part of the pomoerium of the
original settlement, the Acropolis being then the τέμενος of Pelasgian Zeus. Hence no
human beings were to live there. μὴ—due
to the prohibition implied in ἐπάρατον. τοιόνδε
— i.e.
μὴ οἰκεῖν
αὐτό, the relative construction disappearing. See c.
4,
5.
Πελαργικὸν ἀργὸν
—such παρονομασία is common in oracles. See
c.
54,
2.
ἄμεινον
—a
favourite word at Delphi, suiting well the oracle which worked
by
suggestion rather than command.
ἐξῳκήθη
—‘was
filled with settlers.’
Ξυμβῆναι
—‘to
have been fulfilled in a manner con- trary to their
expectations,’
because the troubles were the cause instead of the result of the
occupation.
ἢ προσεδέχοντο
—Haase suggested ἢ {ᾗ} προσεδέχοντο, but the relative
may be omitted.
γενέσθαι
—sc.
δοκοῦσι from δοκεῖ
above. So Burke, Reflections, ‘In England we
are said to learn manners at seeond-hand from your side of the
water, and that we dress our behaviour in the frippery of France’ (i.e, it is said that we dress).
προῄδει
—i.e.
warned them that the place would some day be inhabited in time of
adversity.
μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ
—after
οἶδα the regular negative is οὐ.
This μὴ implies a sense of
authoritative declaration in
οἶδα, and is not a colloquial license. M. T. 688. μὴ
belongs to ἀγαθῷ.
Κατεσκευάσαντο
—‘fonnd
quarters.’
ὡς ἕκαστός που
—
Aristoph. Eq. 792, Andoc. ap. Suid. s.v.
σκάνδιξ. Andocides refers to the difficulty of getting
good food.
ἐχώρησε
—from this early trans. use of χωρεῖν comes the meaning ‘receive’ of
persons, as in St. Matthew xix. 12.
Ἥπτοντο
—cf. Plat.
Phaedo, 64 A ὀρθῶς ἁπτόμενοι
φιλοσοφίας. Thuc. speaks of the Athenians generally:
while the country people were settling down as best they could, the
Athenians were meanwhile busy with the details connected with the
war, both τὰ ἔξω,
ξυμμάχους ἀγείροντες, and τὰ
ἔνδον, ναῦς ἐξαρτύοντες. τῇ Π.
.—c.
56,
1.
ἐν τούτῳ π.
— cf. VII. 50,
4 ἐν παντὶ ἀθυμίας .
Τῆς Ἀτ. ἐς Οἰνόην
—for order cf. c.
21,
1, 25, 3.
Οἰνόην
—there were two roads to Attica,
the one a bad one by the coast, the other an inland one, leading
over Cithaeron by the Pass of the Oak's Heads (Δρυὸς Κεφαλαί) and passing Eleutherae,
which is probably the site of Oenoe. In any case Oenoe was on the
frontier between Attica and Boeotia and just where the road from
Athens and Eleusis branched off, one way to Plataea, the other to
the Peloponnese.
ὡς ἐκαθέζοντο
—the imperfect implies a
prolonged stay. Cf. c.
19,
and see c.
3,
1.
προσβολὰς
—the siege was preliminary to
the invasion. See 19, 1.
παρεσκευάζοντο
—for the omission of ὡς with the participle, cf. c.
91,
1.
Αὐτῷ—follows the gender of the
predicate, instead of that of the antecedent.
φρουρίῳ
—because
it commanded the pass. A similar importance attached to Phyle
and
Decelea.
ἄλλως
—‘in
other ways.’
Αἰτίαν τε
—to
the end of the chapter is parenthetical.
ἔλαβεν ... δοκῶν ... οὐ
παραινῶν
—
δοκῶν gives the cause of ἔλαβεν,
παραινῶν the cause of
δοκῶν. Cf. c.
86
ἀνθώρμουν ... γνώμην ἔχοντες ... φοβούμενοι. αὐτοῦ
—of
what has just been described, as often.
ἐν τῇ ξυναγωγῇ
—in
bello conflando. So Isocr. οἶμαι
τὸν πόλεμον θεῶν τινα συναγαγεῖν. ἐπειδή τε
—
this τε joins
ξυνελέγετο to ἐν τῇ
ξυναγωγῇ. Four periods are distinguished, (1) the time
when Sparta was seeking a casus belli, (2)
the time when the contingents were assembling at the Isthmus, (3)
the march to Oenoe, (4) the delay at Oenoe
ἥ τε
—this
τε belongs equally to ἐπειδὴ
ξυν. ὁ στρατός, but the order is distorted for the sake of
the antithesis between the three periods. Cf. c.
13,
2.
κατὰ τὴν
—i.e.
ἡ κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην
π.
σχολαιότης. Cf. Intr. p. xl.
ἄλλην
—exclusive,
‘as well.’
μάλιστα δὲ
—the
most inelegant section in the book. The repetition of what has
been
said in 2 above is clumsy.
Ἐπελθόντες ἂν
—the ἂν belongs to
καταλαβεῖν only; of course ἂν
is constantly attracted to a partic. which forms the protasis; but
sometimes the
ἂν also belongs to the partic., which is part of the
apodosis, as c.
53,
4 βιοὺς
ἂν ... ἀντιδοῦναι. (In some cases it is
not easy to decide whether the partic. belongs to prot. or apod., as Demosth. Phil. 1, 1.)
Ἐν ... ὀργῇ
—see c.
59,
2.
Πᾶσαν ἰδέαν
—adverbial, = πάντα τρόπον. πειρά‐
σαντες
—se. αὐτῆς. In Attic
πειρῶμαι =
conari. Only Herod. and Thuc. among prose writers use the
aetive in this sense. [
τῶν ἐ. Θηβαίων
]—Intr.
p. xxxix.
ὀγδοηκοστῇ
—i.e.
about June 20th.
ἀκμάζοντος
—denotes
the time preeeding ripeness, in Attica the end of May and the
greater part of June.
ἡγεῖτο δὲ
—Archidamus has been already
referred to again and again as the general. But ef. c.
47,
2, 71, 1; III.
1,
1, 26, 2, 89, 1; IV.
2,
1; V. 54,
1, 57, 1; VII.
19,
1.
ὴγεμὼν is the technieal word for the Peloponnesian
general, cf. I. 128
Παυσανίας
ὁ ἡγεμὼν τῆς Σπάρτης, and the name of the
ἡγεμὼν —generally one of the kings—in command of a
Spartan expedition is regularly given as a matter of form. As
regards Sparta, ἡγεμὼν is
regularly the title of a king or regent. Thus Brasidas is ealled
only
στρατηγὸς or ἄρχων .
Καθεζόμενοι
—for the tense, ef. c.
18,
1.
Ἐλευ‐ σῖνα καὶ τὸ Θ. πεδίον
—the
country round Eleusis.
περὶ τοὺς Ῥειτοὺς
—two
salt lakes on the boundary between the land of Athens and
Eleusis,
at the eorner of the Thriasian plain. From Eleusis Archidamus
had
followed the Sacred Way.
Αἰγάλεων
—instead of ‘turning off to the
eastward,’ as Grote says, Archidamus probably continued along the
direct road to Athens, i.e. the Saered Way,
erossing the pass of Daphni, and only then turned north towards
Mount Parnes. This agrees better with ἐν
δεξιᾷ ἔχοντες τὸ Αἰ. (Mount Skarmanga). The question is
eomplicated by the uneertainty of the position of the deme Cropia.
χρόνον πολὺν
—with ἔτεμνον. ἐμμείναντες
—‘having
settled there.’ ἐμμένειν is
regularly used of persons: thus ἐμμένω
ταῖς
σπονδαῖς, not αἱ
σπονδαὶ ἐμμένουσιν is the ordinary idiom. For
exeeptions, see c. 2, 1
not. crit.
Καί τινα
—the
principal sentence.
Πλειστοάνακτα
—when Euboea and Megara revolted from Athens 445 B.C., and
Pericles
had crossed to Euboea, Pleistoanax invaded Attica, but retreated
after ravaging the Thriasian plain, as Pericles returned.
μεμνημένοι.
.ὅτε...ἀνεχώρησε
—‘remembering the
time when.’ Cf. c.
54,
4 μνήμη
ἐγένετο . ὅτε (ὁ θεὸς
) ἀνεῖλε.
Eur. Hec. 112
οἶσθ’
ὅτε χρυσέοις ἐφάνη ξὺν ὅπλοις. Only
ὅτε is used in prose to mark a date. See c.
98,
1. So ‘audivi eum eum diceret.’
ἐσβαλὼν ... οὐκέτι προελθὼν
— both temporal; cf. c. 68, 3, 71,
2, where also the time of the first precedes that of the
second.
ἐς Ἐ. καὶ Θριῶζε
—
i.e.
ἐς Ἐ. καὶ τὸ Θριάσιον πεδίον. ἐς
τὸ π. οὐκέτι
—‘without
advancing further.’ Cf. I.
114
τὸ πλἐον οὐκέτι
προελθόντες. With the eomparative the ‐έτι is superfluous, but idiomatic.
ἡ φυγὴ
—Thuc. writes as though he had
mentioned this before, but nothing is said about it in I. 114,
and it is again referred to incidentally V. 16.
It must have been a very famous event.
Ὡς εἰκὸς
—with
ἐφαίνετο. ἐν τῷ
ἐμφανεῖ
—)(ἐν
τῷ ἀφανεῖ
I.
136.
ἐν in an adverbial phrase is eommon.
πλὴν
—here an adverb. Cf. c.
34.
So ad =
ὡς, Livy XXI. 22, 3 ad
mille oetingenti, though that use is limited to cases in whieh mille or millia
intervenes.
τὰ Μηδικὰ
—‘at the time of the Persian
war.’ Cf. I.
3,
4 τὰ
πρὸ Ἕλληνος. Adverbial aceusative, as in τὸ πρῶτον. μὴ περιορᾶν
—distinguish
(a) οὐκ ἐδόκει
περιορᾶν, ‘it did not seem good to overlook it,’ (b) ἐδόκει
οὐ περιορᾶν, ‘it seemed that they were not overlooking
it,’ (c) ἐδόκει μὴ
περιορᾶν, ‘it seemed better not to,’
i.e. ‘they determined not to,’ implying ‘preferenee or
deprecation.’ Rutherford. Syntax, p. 132.
Κατὰ ξ. γ.
—so
γίγνομαι is often used with participial expressions. Cf.
c.
3
ἐκ τοῦ
ἴσου γίγνεσθαι. The style here beeomes more animated,
the conflicting passions being described, as usual, in short
eo-ordinate sentences.
οἱ μὲν
— apposition to the universal
subject. Cf. c.
16,
1.
παντοίους, ὡς ἀκροᾶσθαι
—
i.e. every man, to whatever side he belonged, eould quote his
own oraele-monger.
ὥρμητο
—with infin., as in c. 59. παρὰ
—c.
72,
2.
παντί τε
—this
τε sums up the preeeding three.
στρατηγὸς ὢν
—Pericles being στρατηγὸς αὐτοκράτωρ (speeially given
unlimited powers) could prevent any of his colleagues from leading
them out.
ὑπεξαγάγοι
— cause assigned by the
people. Hence optative.
Γιγνώσκειν περὶ τοῦ μὴ
—cf. c.
55.
For the reason of his action, see Intr. p. lxix.
ἐκκλησίαν τε ... τήν τε
—the double τε implies two coneurrent acts having
the same object in view.
ἐποίει
—‘summon.’
ἐκκλησία means the regular meeting (κυρία
ἐκκλησία) which only a στρατηγὸς
αὐτοκράτωρ could prevent. It was ordinarily held in each
Prytany. ξύλλογος means a special
meeting (συγκλητὸς ἐκκλησία). Cf.
c.
59
and IV. 114, 120. These were summoned by the
Prytanes at the request of the Strategi. (Gilbert, Beitr.
zur
innern Geschichte, p. 14, explains this passage
differently.) As so many eountry people were now in Athens, all
opposed to the war, it would have been very dangerous to eall a
meeting.
οὐδένα
—but he could not prevent the ξυστάσεις: club intrigues and sueh
strained eombinations of opposed interests as oecur in times of
excitement took the plaee of ordinary politics. In this hazy
atmosphere the figure of Cleon looms indistinctly. (We cannot
penetrate into the workings of the
ἑταιρεῖαι to which Thuc. refers; but Grote is quite
mistaken in saying that Cleon rose now ‘as an opposition speaker.’
He was preparing for the great attaek on Pericles that was made in
430 B.C. Intr. p. lxxvi.)
δῑ ἡσυχίας
—c.
13,
2.
Τοῦ μὴ
—purpose,
a rare construction outside Thuc.
ἐσπίπτοντας ἐς
κακουργεῖν
—the eommon object
is accommodated to the participle. See c.
13,
2.
ἀγροὺς
—the
Attic plain.
Φρυγίοις
—somewhere
between Athens and Acharnae in the plain.
τροπὴ ἐγένετο
—pass. of τ. ἐποιήσαντο, c.
19.
Τὸ παλαιὸν ξ
—made
461 B.C., the Thessalians being enemies of the Dorians and
Boeotians
from early times. The allianee was made when Sparta sent away
the
foree which Athens sent to help to subdue the helots.
Πολυμήδης καὶ Ἀριστόνους
—these suggestive
names are one outeome of the visit of Gorgias to Larissa, which had
previously prided itself on ἱππικὴ
rather than σοφία. Plat.
Meno, 70 B, Isoer. 15,
155 .
ἀπὸ τῆς στάσεως
—the Sehol. says ἡ Λάρισσα ἐστασίασε πρὸς ἑαυτήν·
διὸ
ἑκατέρα μερὶς
ἄρχοντα εἶχε. λέγει δὲ ὅτι ἑκατέρα στάσις δύναμιν Ἀθηναίοις
ἀπέστειλεν. οἱ μὲν γὰρ δημοκρατίαν ἤγαγον, οἱ δὲ ὀλιγαρχίαν.
These explanations are based only on the passage. It is more
probable that Thue. means that the troops of Larissa were in two
divisions, each having its own general Cf. c.
36,
1; VI. 62.
The meanings of μέρος and στάσις are much alike, and as μέρος sometimes has a political, so
στάσις perhaps has a military sense. Cf.
centuria. A. Philippi, Rhein. Mus.
36, p. 245, proposes ἀρχηγὸς τῆς στάσεως
for ἀπὸ τ. ς. Larissa was the most
important state in Thessaly. Its prinees elaimed to be descended
from Heracles, Pind. Pyth.
10. (Herodian settles the orthography. It must
be admitted that the analogy of Thebes, and of Sparta to some
extent, favours the explanation of the Sehol.)
κατὰ πόλεις
—though the cities of Thessaly had separate prinees, they seem
to
have been connected by allianee.
Ἐκεῖ
—the
Messenians of Naupactus, placed there by Athens 455 B.C., the
Acarnamans and Zaeynthians.
Μεθώνην
—contrast the order in e. 18, 1 and 3 below. M., now Modon, is in
Messenia, but after the Messenian Wars, circa 650 B.C., Messenia
belonged to Laeonia. About the same date, the inhabitants of
Nauplia, expelled from Argolis, were settled in Methone by Sparta,
to hold the port in her interest as the Messenians afterwards held
Naupaetus for Athens.
προσέβαλον
—they
thought to take it by assault, judging a regular approaeh
unnecessary.
ὄντι ... ἐνόντων
—see on e.
4, 4.
οὐκ ἐνόντων
—se. τῷ
τείχει. There were however men in the place, but it was
ungarrisoned. The attaek was a surprise.
Περὶ τοὺς χ. τ.
—the only phrase in which the
plur. of χῶρος oceurs in Thue. Cf.
c.
101,
2; III. 102,
4.
Βρασίδας
—Thuc.
admired Brasidas and relates many of his adventures. They may be
read again, adorned with rhetorieal effects, in Diodorus.
φρουρὰν ἔχων
—‘with an expeditionary
force,’ sent to protect the eoast of Messenia. Cf. φρουρὰν
φαίνειν in Xen., ‘to send out a force.’
τετραμμένον
—‘with their attention
oceupied.’ Cf. c.
40,
2. So versus
ad.
ἐπῃνέθη
—by a decree passed in his
honour, the usual sense of ἐπαινῶ
in such eases.
Σχόντες
—cf. c.
33,
3.
Φειὰν
—now
Katakolo, the landing-place for visitors to Olympia.
ἐπὶ δύο ἡ
—cf. c.
86,
5. A rare use of ἐπί. Cf. Andoc.
II. 8 λύπας ἐπὶ χρόνον πλεῖστον φέρειν. τῆς
κοίλης Ἤλιδος
—the
physieal conditions of the eountry as well as the feud between Elis
and Pisatis over the management of the games dating from the 7th
cent. B.C., prevented any real union in this district. The N. part,
in the valley of the Peneus, was ἡ
κοιλή, and was taken by the Aetolian Epeans or
vαλεῖοι (Lat. vallis) from the earlier population.
λογάδας
—Ionie for
ἐπιλέκτους, used by no other Attic prose writer. Eur. Hec. 544.
Suidas s.v.
λογάδην. αὐτόθεν
—
i.e. from the neighbourhood of Pheia itself, whieh, being
in Pisatis, belonged to the περιοικίς. ἐκ τῆς περιοικίδος
—epexegesis
of αὐτόθεν, but also showing that
the relieving party was drawn not merely from the
immediate neighbourhood of Pheia, but from Pisatis and Triphylia
generally (ἡ περιοικίς, the sense
being political not
geographical ).
Ἀνέμου κατιόντος
—cf. c.
84
; VI. 2,
4. The regular word of a breeze getting up at sea.
ἐπέβησαν ἐπὶ
—so
I. 111
; VII. 69
;
less eommonly simple dat. Contrast
ἐπιβαίνω with gen., ‘to set foot in.’
Ἰχθῦν
—the
promontory on whieh Pheia lay, now C. Katakolo.
τὸν ...λιμένα
—probably
Pontikokastro. [
οἱ...ἐπιβῆναι
]—this could only apply to ἄλλοι τινές: but it is probably a note
on οἱ Μεσσήνιοι
καὶ ἄλλοι .
Προσεβεβοηθήκει
—plup.,
because this had caused the departure of the Athenians.
Πυθέω
—Ionic gen. of
Πύθης. Cf. Τηρέω
below.
εἶχε
—sc.
γυναῖκα. Cf. Andoc. I. 50 ὃς ἔχει
σου τὴν ἀδελφήν.
Σιτάλκης
—see
c. 95-102.
πρόξενον
—their
representative in the kingdom of the Odrysae.
Τὴν μεγάλην βασίλειαν
—the
great kingdom existing in 431.
ἐπὶ πλεῖον τῆς ἄλλης
—there are several ways of
explaining this. The old rendering was ‘made it more powerful than
the rest of Thrace,’ but this strains ἐπὶ
πλεῖον. The others are (1) ‘extended his kingdom over a
great part of Thrace,’ (2) ‘established it over a greater territory
than the rest of Thrace comprised,’
i.e. it included more than half of Thrace, (3) ‘formed it
on a larger scale than the rest of Thraee.’ Probably (2) is right; I. 9,
3, 71, 3 are similar.
Προσήκει οὐδέν
—at
a time when Athens was trying to form a conneetion with Thrace,
it
was natural that people should try to eonneet Athenian history
with
Thraeian.
τὸ ἔργον
—a hint at the murder of Itys by
Procne and Philomela. Ovid, Met. VI. 620. For
the attitude of Thuc. towards these myths, see Grote I. p. 389.
πολλοῖς
—the ordinary prose rule for the
agent with perf. pass, which Thuc. generally follows, is that the
dat. is used when the subject is nonpersonal: when the subject is a
person,
ὑπὸ and gen. is invariably
used.
ἐν ἀηδόνος μνήμῃ
—‘in
referenees to the nightingale.’
εἰκὸς δὲ
—for this argument cf. c.
11,
8. It was used only by orators and historians: philosophers laughed
at it.
κῆδος
—an
Ionie word for ‘a connexion by marriage,’ found in Herod.,
Tragedy
and late writers.
διὰ τοσούτου
— ‘at so short a distance.’
Cf. c.
12,
1.
πολλῶν ἡμερῶν
— depends on ὁδοῦ, see c.
13,
7.
Τὰ ἐπὶ Θ
—the
Chalcidian towns, which were causing much anxiety at the time.
Περδίκκαν
—he had acted against Athens in
the matter of Potidaea. I. 57-62. ξυνελεῖν
—
‘to help to establish their influence over.’
Τε
—‘and
so.’
ἐποίησε
—contrast with ἐποιήσαντο in 4 above.
Σάδοκον
—this presentation of the freedom
of Athens amused and disgusted many. See Aristoph. Acharn.
141 .
Ἀθηναῖον
—Muller-Strubing places καὶ Σάδοκον . .Ἀθηναῖον after ξύμμαχον
ἐποιήσαντο above, on the ground that Thuc. could not
say that an Abderite made a man a citizen: but it is plain that
Thuc. refers to formalities earried out by the Proxenus when a
member of his state was made a citizen of the state of which he was
Proxenus. (So μυεῖν, ‘to initiate’
into the mysteries, a privilege belonging to the Eumolpidae, and
Ceryees is used inexaetly of the man who introduces a candidate for
initiation. Cf. [Dem.] 59, 21, Andoc. 1, 132
.
Ξυνεβίβασε
—a
great gain to Athens. Cf. Intr. p. lxviii.
Θέρμην
—eaptured by Athens in 432. I. 61,
2. τ’—‘and so.’
Φορμίωνος
—he had gone with
reinforeements to Potidaea in 432. See c.
2,
1. He had been Strategus in the Samian War, and again held offiee in
430 and 429. I. 64, 117; e. 69,
80,
102.
Οὕτω μὲν
—the usual way in whieh Thue.
summarises and dismisses a subject to pass to another. Cf. e. 4, 9,
15, 20.
Νόμῳ
—‘custom.’ See c.
35,
1.
ταφὰς
—funeral) )
τάφος, tomb.
ἐν τῷδε τῷ π
—see e. 1,
init.
ἀποθανόντων
—in the siege of Potidaea, during the skirmishes with the
invaders
in Attica, and in the two coast expeditions.
Ὀστᾶ
—the bodies had been burnt already
at the scene of the action, then the bones were collected and buried
at Athens. Cf. Plato,
Phaedo, 80 D ἔνια μέρη τοῦ σώματος,
ὁστᾶ τε καὶ νεῦρα καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ἀθάνατά ἐστιν.
προτίθενται
—
proponunt.
ἀπογενομένων
—ef. c.
51,
5. An Ionie word. Herod. II.
85.
Suidas, s.v.
ἀπεγένετο, says οὕτως Ἀντιφῶν
καὶ Θουκυδίδης. Probably it was used in ritual, as
ἀποκτιννύναι for ἀποκτείνειν. πρότριτα
—so Aristoph.
Lys. 611. Cf. πρόπεμπτα.
Both words puzzled ancient commentators. We should say ‘two days’
(before the ἐκφορά).
σκηνὴν ποιήσαντες
—in
the agora, whieh was in the deme Cerameicus.
ἤν τι
—not
the things whieh the dead were supposed to require for their
existenee below, but fancy presents.
ἐπειδὰν
—used here like ὅταν. Contrast 6 below, and c.
72,
3.
κυπαρισσίνας
—the
sehol. says that cypress was used beeause it does not easily
deeay.
Cl. says this is mere imagination; but at Veniee carved chests
of
cypress were used in the time of Shakspere for keeping valuable
stuffs in. (‘Taming of the Shrew,’ II. 1 In cypress chests my
arras.) The faet that it was used for coffins may be the reason
why
it was saered to the dead.
φυλῆς
—the members of a φυλὴ were buried together (a) because the
φυλαὶ were the largest aggregates based on the family, (b) because
they were the basis of military organisation.
ἧς ἕκαστος—ἕκ. is put into the
relative clause, as in c.
17,
3.
κενὴ
—every effort had to be made to
reeover the dead; only for those who were not found after eareful
search was the symbolic burial sufficient.
Eur. Hel. 1241
Ἕλλησίν
έστι νόμος ὃς ἂν πόντῳ θάνῃ [κενοῖσι θάπτειν ἐν πέπλων ὑφάσμασιν. τῶν ἀφανῶν
—with κλίνη. For the expression,
cf. VIII. 38
ἀποπλέων
ἐν κέλητι ἀφανίζεται.
Ὁ βουλόμενος
—the
generic art. is post-Homeric.
ξένων
—thus
the aliens would hear the funeral oration, in which Athens was
always extolled.
αἱ προσήκουσαι
—this limits γυναῖκες, lit. ‘I mean those who are
related.’
ἐπὶ τὸν τάφον
—the
women might be present at the grave, but did not walk in the
proeession from the agora.
Προαστείου
—that
part of the Cerameieus which was outside the gates was used as a
cemetery. It was to Athens what the Appian Way was to Rome. It
was
just outside the Dipylon, the chief and double gateway of
Athens.
Probably it means ‘the potters' quarter,’ the Athenian potteries
being famous. Cf. the potters' field in St. Matthew, XXVII. 7,
whieh
was bought ‘to bury strangers in.’
πλὴν
—see c.
21,
2.
ἐν Μαραθῶνι
—see not.
crit. Some critics, while admitting ἐν
Σαλαμῖνι, deny that ἐν
can be used with
Μαραθῶνι, and no case where the metre requires ἐν before
Μαραθῶνι is found. The names of the sites of famous
battles are used elliptically.
αὐτοῦ
—on
the battle-field.
καὶ
—as
well as burning the bodies.
τάφον ἐποίησαν
—‘made them their grave.’
The mound raised over it still exists, as also the remains of the
trophy of victory set up in 490 B.C.
ᾙρημένος ὑπὸ
—the subject is a person;
therefore ὑπὸ and not the dat. is
used with the perf. pass.
μὴ ἀξύνετος
—i.e.
ξυνετώτατος. ἀξιώσει
—Grote
and Shil. say ἀξίωσις means the
estimate one has of oneself; ἀξίωμα
that which others have of one. Such a wide difference does not exist
here. ἀξίωσις is the recogintion
of a man's γνώμη. προήκῃ
—rare for προέχῃ. ἐπ’
αὐτοῖς
—the
prep. marks the occasion. Cf. 8 below, 35, 1, 42, 1. So in the orators.
ἔ. τὸν πρέποντα
—mark the order. c.
2.
2.
Ξυμβαίη
—sc. θάπτειν
τοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πολέμου, i.e. at the
end of each campaign.
Καιρὸς ἐλάμβανε
—‘at the right moment,’ = κ. κατε‐ λάμβανε. Cf. c.
18,
2.
ὑψηλὸν πεποιημένον
—together. Ste.
however places the stop after ὑψηλόν. ὡς
ἐπὶ πλεῖστον
—so ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ
IV. 29,
3; ἐπί
πλέον c.
53,
1 (cf. c.
29,
2 note). Cf. Eur.
Sup. 857
fol.
ἔλεγε
—now follows the λόγος ἐπιτάφιος. It is more worked up
than any other speech in Thuc., and conforms closely to the
rhetorical rules. The other λ.
ἐπιτάφιοι extant are one ascribed to Lysias, one to
Demosthenes (see 44, 2), the
Menexenus ascribed to Plato; fragments of one by Gorgias (see
Intr. p. xlii.), and a considerable part of one by Hypereides.
Doderlein says of the speech ‘Arte dicentis ad laudes Athenarum
inflexum ac potius ad comparationem vitae Atheniensium liberae,
liberalis, vere vitalis, cum tetrica angustaque et aerumnosa
Spartanorum disciplina.’
Ἐπαινοῦσι
—
ἔπαινος filled λ. ἐπιταφίους. τὸν
προσθέντα
—it
is not known who instituted the custom. It was of course ascribed to
Solon. After a time, the subjects dealt with became traditional
commonplaces. Dion. Hal. enumerates them (Ars
Rhet. VI.) as πατρίς, γένος,
φύσις, ἀγωγή, πρᾶξις. Then he shows how the subjects
should be treated.
ὡς καλὸν
—sc. ὄν
. M. T. 875.
νόμῳ
—probably
‘institution.’
ἀρκοῦν
—used
as an adj.
ἂν ἐδόκει
—
censeam, often instead of
censeo, as a polite expression, ‘I am inclined to think’;
if I had to settle the matter I should hold. Cf. Burke, On
American Taxation, ‘For my part I should choose (if I could
have my wish).’
ἔργῳ δηλοῦσθαι
—in
a public burial, in honour paid to the tomb (a very important
matter
to the Greeks), and in privileges to the family.
τιμάς, οἷα
—the change to neuter shows
that only an instance of the many kinds of
τιμαὶ is given.
περὶ
—not
local, but ‘at’ meaning ‘on the occasion of.’
παρασκευασθέντα
— with οἷα. καὶ μὴ κ.τ.λ.—Gottleber
makes πιστευθῆναι subj. of κινδυνεύεσθαι ,
i.e.
καὶ (τὸ ) πολλῶν
ἀρετὰς πιστευθῆναι μὴ
κινδυνεύεσθαι ἐν ἑνί. (This is better than making
πιστευθῆναι depend on
κινδυνεύεσθαι, as then ἢ οὔ
would be required after
πιστευθῆναι.)
ἐν ἑνὶ
—cf. Eur.
I. T.1057-8
καὶ τἄμ’ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἢ
καλῶς ἔχειν
ἢ μηδὲν εἶναι
. For the pass.
κινδυνεύεται cf. c.
43,
5.
πιστευθῆναι
—for omission of τό, cf. c.
39,
4.
εὖ τε καὶ χεῖρον
—
sive bene sive
male dixerit.
τὸ μετρίως εἰπεῖν
—explained by what follows as
meaning neither ἐνδεεστέρως
δηλοῦν nor πλεονάζειν
.
ἐν ᾧ
— in
a case where. Cf. c.
1.
In this phrase, the relative does not refer to any definite
antecedent, but rather to the whole preceding clause.
δόκησις
—even if the speaker is sure he
has hit the mean, he finds it hard to convey that impression to his
hearers. The word δόκησις ,
impression, is tragic, and used by no other prose writer.
See c.
14,
1.
ἀληθείας
— truthfulness
.
ἐνδεεστέρως
—cf. c.
50
χαλεπωτέρως. Thuc. uses a considerable
number of such comparatives. They are rare in other prose writers
(Dobree, Advers. II. 208), except indeed only
after ἔχειν intrans., as Plato,
Phaedo, 75A
ἔχει δὲ ἐνδεεστέρως.
πρὸς
—prae. Cf. c.
62,
3, 65, 10.
ἀκούοι
—protasis to ἂν
νομίσειε.
τῷ ὑπερβάλλοντι αὐτῶν
—viz. τῶν
ἐπαίνων, that
which
transgresses the limit in
these panegyrics they actually discredit. See on c.
59,
3 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης.
φθονοῦντες
—not that
they envy the dead (which the speaker says is not the case c.
45,
1), but they do not like to hear another's praises exaggerated,
whether he be living or dead (περὶ
ἑτέρων
ἔπαινοι). Cf. Herod. III. 52 φθονέεσθαι
κρέσσον ἐστὶν ἢ
οἰκτείρεσθαι. Pind. Pyth. I. 85 κρέσσων οἰκτιρμοῦ φθόνος .
Ἐπειδὴ
—resumes ἐμοὶ
δ’ in 1 above.
ἐδοκιμάσθη
—properly of the preliminary
test to which newly-appointed officials had to submit to prove they
were qualified. Hence
δεδοκιμασμένος, like
spectatus, ‘tried and approved.’ The word shows Pericles
has in his mind a custom rather than a law.
Ἄρξομαι
—here begins a subsidiary
introduction, the object of which is to get rid of the conventional topics in few words, and lead up
to the prothesis (see 4 below).
προγόνων
—dismissed with merely a
respectful mention, as Pericles' real business is with the present,
not the past. He begins with
πρόγονοι, the θεοὶ
χθόνιοι, as poets and orators begin with the gods.
Plato does it sometimes at the beginning of a long discussion; cf.
Livy's conclusion to his preface, and the opening of Demosth. de
Cor.
πρῶτον
—not pleonastic, for the analysis
shows that the
ἀρχὴ of the speech contains three points.
δίκαιον .. πρέπον
—the
former of one's duty towards others, the latter of one's duty
towards oneself.
αὐτοῖς
—with
δίδοσθαι. καὶ π. δὲ
ἅμα
—like non
modo ... sed etiam.
ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε
—‘on such an occasion as this.’
οἱ αὐτοὶ
—predicate with οἰκοῦντες. The Athenians prided
themselves on being αὐτόχθονες.
διαδοχῇ
—instrumental.
Πατέρες
—he
passes to the period of the Persian Wars.
πρὸς οἷς
—they
received Attica; they
left the maritime confederacy.
ἀρχὴν
—Pericles avoids stating the steps
by which the Athenian
ἡγεμονία was turned into an
ἀρχή .
Τὰ πλείω
—is
accus. of respect, and refers especially to the internal
improvements, made in the age of Pericles, of whatever kind. As
for
the material improvements—buildings and walls—Pericles'
connection
with them precluded him from referring to them in detail.
ἡμεῖς
—Pericles was born about 490 B.C.
Hence μάλιστα, ‘more or less.’
ἐν τῇ καθ
—lit. ‘living in settled life,’ i.e. ‘in the vigour of life,’ the time
between growth and decay. Cic. Cat. maj. 76
constans aetas quae media dicitur.
ἐπηυξήσαμεν
—‘have
improved it.’
αὐταρκεστάτην
—by
the increase of the revenue and the advance of culture.
Ὧν—αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν πατέρων.
οἷς κ.τ.λ.—of the Persian Wars, the reduction of
Naxos (468 B.C.), the war with Thasos (465), those with Corinth,
Epidaurus and Aegina (458), those in Boeotia (457 and 447), that with
Euboea (445) and Samos (440).
ἐκτήθη
—offensive measures) (ἠμυνάμεθα, defensive. [
πόλεμον
]—this would require Ἑλληνικύν, since Ἕλλην can only be used as an adj. with persons, as VII. 42,
1 ἀκοντιστὰς βαρβάρους καὶ Ἕλληνας. ἀπὸ
δὲ
—this
introduces the prothesis, or statement of the
theme of the main portion of the speech (the
πίστις ).
ἐπιτηδεύσεως
—‘principles’ on which
concrete ἐπιτηδεύματα are based.
Pericles will explain the meaning and point out the results of the
ideas which underlie the Athenian constitution, and show that it is
based on philosophy and intelligence. (Aristotle did not admire
Pericles much, because Athens degenerated so rapidly after his
death; and Plato thought little of most men who took part in public
affairs: but the passage in Phaedo, 82 A οἱ
τὴν δημοτικήν τε καὶ
πολιτικὴν ἀρετὴν ἐπιτηδευκότες, ἣν δὴ καλοῦσι σωφροσύνην τε
καὶ
δικαιοσύνην, ἐξ ἔθους τε καὶ μελέτης γεγονυῖαν ἄνευ
φιλοσοφίας τε
καὶ
νοῦ, could not apply to Pericles and the circle of
Anaxagoras. See Appendix in Archer—Hind's edition).
αὐτὰ
—cf. c.
1
ἕκαστα , 43, 1.
μεθ’ οἵας
—the prepositions are important. ἀπὸ gives the remote origin, ἐξ the immediate cause, μετὰ the circumstances under which the
result was produced. From both ἀπὸ
and ἐκ must be distinguished ὑπό, of the agent (see Class.
Rev. III. 436 a ),
πολιτείας
—of public and active life) (τρόπων, of personal relations, and
intellectual life.
ταῦτα δηλώσας
—‘I will
explain this before’ etc. The main emphasis is on the partic. as c.
12,
2.
ἐπὶ τῷ παρόντι
—‘under the present
circumstances,’ i.e. at the end of the first
campaign. There will be practical lessons to learn from the
description. Intr. p. lxxii. In the same sense ἐπὶ
τοῖς παροῦσιν is used VIII. 54,
4.
ἀπρεπῆ
— predicate, with λεχθῆναι. Cf. c.
102,
6.
ἀστῶν
—so
that they might lay to heart the lesson to be learnt.
ξένων
— see c.
34,
4.
ξύμφορον
—neut. The general topic of the πίστις is τὸ
ξυμφέρον. It is changed at c.
43
for τὸ καλόν. ἐπακοῦσαι
—‘to
hear with attention’) (ὑπακούειν
‘to hear and obey.’
Οὐ ζηλούσῃ
—the
institutions of Sparta were based on those of Crete.
παράδειγμα
—probably a reference to the
embassy sent from Rome to Athens in 454 B.C. to examine the laws of
Solon. Livy III. 31. (Hertz, N.
Jahrb. 1881, p. 283 fol.)
ὄντες
—the partic. is constructed with
the subject instead of with
πολιτείᾳ, so that the pride of the people is directly
appealed to.
ὄνομα
—adverb.
accus.
ἐς ὀλίγους . . οἰκεῖν
—‘the administration is in the
hands not of a few but of the majority.’
οἰκεῖν is here intrans. = ‘to be administered,’ and the
subject is ἡ
πολιτεία. Cf. Plat.
Rep. VIII p. 547 C πῶς οἰκήσει
(αὕτη ἡ πολιτεία);
δ. κέκληται
—‘our constitution is called a
democracy.’ Then μέτεστι
δὲ κ.τ.λ. explains that, though named a democracy, the
name does not mean that the claims of excellence are disregarded.
πρὸς τὰ ἴδια δ
——‘in protecting their private
interests,’) (ἐς τὰ
κοινὰ below.
πᾶσι
— i.e.
ὀλίγοι, as well as δῆμος. The two cardinal principles on
which the democracy rested were
ἰσονομία and ἐλευθερία.
All being equal in the eyes of the law, the majority of necessity
controlled the state. Pericles was convinced that complete democracy
was necessary, as only under such a government had all an equal
chance of developing their abilities; all being, as Isocr. says, ἐκ τῆς δημοκρατίας πεπαιδευμένοι. κατὰ
δὲ
—antithesis to μέτεστι πᾶσι rather than to κατὰ μὲν τοὺς νόμους. ἀξίωσιν
—
existimatio, the consideration accorded to merit,
recognition of personal claims
εὐδοκιμεῖ
—he
alludes especially to officials elected by show of hands, such
as
the strategi. Those offices which required no special knowledge
were
filled by lot. Whether the best men were always elected is
doubtful.
Pericles only claims that nothing stood in the way of merit.
οὐκ ἀπὸ μέρους
— ‘not on account of his rank so much as.’
μέρος = a particular class, such as the ὁμοῖοι of Sparta.
ἀγαθόν τι δρᾶσαι
—see c.
64,
1; Plat. Rep. I. 332 A.
ἀξιώματος ἀφανείᾳ
—the result of ἀξίωσις is
ἀξίωμα, a position in the state: ‘by the obscurity of his
position.’
κεκώλυται
—sc. ἀγαθόν
τι δρᾶσαι τὴν πόλιν, a clear statement that abilities are
to be devoted to the advancement of the state. (This
was the theory of all the best Athenian statesmen: there was some
sense in the Seriphian's insult to Themistocles, οὐ δῑ
αὑτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν πόλιν εὐδοκιμεῖ.)
Ἐλευθέρως
—the
same liberal spirit that we show in public life underlies all
our
private relations.
τά τε .. καὶ
—parataxis: ‘as ... so.’
πολιτεύομεν
—lit. live in the state, τὰ πρὸς τὸ κ. being internal accus. ‘as
regards our public life,’ quod
attinet ad rempublicam.
ἐς τὴν ὑποψίαν
—‘in respect of that mutual
suspicion often felt (
τὴν) in the daily business of life.’
ἐπιτηδευμάτων
—the outcome of following
any particular
ἐπιτήδευσις (see c.
36,
4).
δῑ ὀργῆς . . ἔχοντες
—c.
13,
2.
εἰ ... δρᾷ
—this merely = τὸν δρῶντα,
i.e. no time is referred to at all.
If it were, ἐάν
τι δρᾷ would be required. Cf. c.
64,
6.
καθ’ ἡδονήν τι δρᾷ
—genio
indulget, ‘does as he likes.’ This is true generally; but in
their religious opinions the Athenians were intolerant.
ἀχθηδόνας
προστιθέμενοι
—‘assuming an
ill-humoured expression.’ τῇ ὄψει
‘on our faces’ may be omitted in trans.; unless, indeed, it belongs
not to
προστιθέμενοι, but to
λυπηράς, ‘annoying to see.’
ἀζημίους is active in meaning.
ἀχθηδὼν (= ἄχθος) is
poetic. Thuc. still alludes to Sparta, where people could not do as
they liked, through the rigorous system of police control enforced
by the ephors.
Ἀνεπαχθῶς
—‘yet, in spite of this freedom
from restraint in our private intercourse, we are in our public acts
most careful to reverence the laws.’ Both τὰ
ἴδια and τὰ
δημόσια are adverbial.
αἰεὶ
—constantly used of the officials
who held office for a year, and denoting the continuous
succession of magistrates.
ἀκροάσει
—‘showing respect to,’ = ἀκροώμενοι, which means lit. ‘listening
eagerly to.’ Cf. c.
21,
3.
αὐτῶν
—with
ὅσοι. ἄγραφοι
—Soph. Antig. 454
ἄγραπτα κἀσφαλῆ
θεῶν|νόμιμα δύνασθαι
θνητὸν
ὄνθ’
ὑπερδραμεῖν . Xen.
Mem. IV. 4, 19. They are the natural laws that
are engraved on the heart of every right-minded individual, so that
none doubt it is disgraceful to transgress them. Cf. Milton: ‘Those
unwritten, or at least unconstraining laws of virtuous education.’
αἰσχύνην ... φέρουσι
—‘bring universally
admitted disgrace,’ sc. τοῖς
παρανομοῦσι.
Ἀναπαύλας
—an
old Attic word, frequent in trag.
τῇ γνώμῃ
—‘for
the mind,’ referring to the humanising and artistic value of the
festivals.
ἀγῶσι
—namely, at the πανηγύρεις, the chief festivals, when
business ceased. Such were the Panathenaic Festival and the
Dionysia.
θυσίαις
—not the ordinary sacrifices, but
those performed at the ἑορταί, the
most important of which were πανηγύρεις. διετησίοις
— ‘which succeed one another throughout the year.’ At
Athens the festivals were more frequent than elsewhere, and perhaps
ridicule was cast upon them by the Spartans, just as the Romans
ridiculed the Jews and Christians for wasting time over their weekly
sabbath.
νομίζοντες
—=
χρώμενοι: an Ionic use, cf. I. 74,
end.
κατασκευαῖς εὐ
—c.
65,
2.
καθ’ ἡμέραν ἡ τέρψις
—
i.e.
ἡ καθ’ ἡ. τέρψις. Cf.
c.
18.
3. For the reason of this transposition, see Intr. p. xl. The object
here is to contrast καθ’
ἡμέραν with διετησίοις,
in which there is a legitimate gain, since καθ’
ἡμέραν is always used of
ordinary business, whereas
διετησίοις applies to the holidays: also to extend the
force of καθ’
ἡ. to ἐκπλήσσει and τὸ λυπηρόν, as in c.
7,
2 ἐξ
Ἰταλίας belongs partly to
ποιεῖσθαι. τὸ λυπηρὸν
—
of the petty worries of life, which oppress the middle classes, and
take all the pleasure out of life. Pericles allndes to Sparta. Cf.
Burke, On American Taxation, ‘If I were to
detail the imports, I could show how many enjoyments they procure
which deceive the burden of life.’
Τὰ πάντα
—cf. c.
11,
6, 36, 4, ‘all that we need.’ The echo in πάσης ... πάντα is what Cornificius
calls traductio. It is a variety of παρονομασία. Cf.
VI.
87,
4 ἐν παντὶ γὰρ πᾶς χωρίῳ. VI. 11,
1 διὰ πολλοῦ γε καὶ πολλῶν ὄντων. οἰκειοτέρᾳ κ.τ.λ.—ht. ‘the
enjoyment with which we reap the harvest of the good things produced
in our own land is not more our own than that of the productions of
the rest of the world,’ i.e. ‘we have the
advantage of enjoying the products of other countries as freely as
those of our own.’
τὰ ἀγαθὰ
—not
the products of the soil only, but those of the mind as well.
αὐτοῦ
—adv., cf. c.
7,
2.
Καὶ
—‘further.’
Here Pericles, who has not before openly alluded to Sparta,
first
avows the contrast.
ταῖς μελέταις ... τοῖσδε
—the
second dat. restricts the first.
τῶν ἐναντίων
—with διαφέρομεν. κοινὴν
—Intr.
p. lxx. end.
ξενηλασίαις
—‘alien acts,’ one of the arcana imperii by which the Ephors tried to
keep ont foreign manners. Strangers were not allowed to settle in Sparta. The Athenians felt this as
an insult. Cf. I. 144.
Aristoph. Av.
1012
ὥσπερ ἐν Λακεδαἰμονι
ξενηλατεῖται. ὃ
...
ὠφεληθείη
—i.e.
ὃ εἰ
ἴδοι μὴ κρυφθὲν ὠφεληθείη ἄν. Thuc. says that he was
unable to obtain information about Spartan military matters owing to
the concealment which the government practised.
v. 9,
5.
Cf. c.
8,
4, and τὸ
κρυπτὸν τῆς πολιτεἰας
v. 68,
2.
τῷ ἀφ’ ἡμῶν ... εὐψύχῳ
some what similar is c.
87,
1 τὰ
ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης. Demosth. 54,
36 — ἡ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ἑτοιμότης. ὄση
καὶ ὅα πρὸς τὸ
ποιεῖν ὁτιοῦν
ὑπάρχει. A rare use outside Thuc.: not found in
Aristoph., very rare in the orators.
ἐς τὰ ἔργα
—contrasted with παρασκευαῖς. Contrast c.
11,
5.
ταῖς παιδείαις
—‘respective
methods of education.’
ἐπιπόνῳ ἀσκήσει
—of the laborious
training to which young Spartans were subjected, being taught to
imitate the courage and gravity of men. The life they led was half
military, half monastic. At Athens
ἐπίπονος was only associated with
γῆρας, not with νεότης.
Plat. Rep. I. p. 329 D.
ἀνειμένως διαιτώμενοι
—cf. I. 6,
3 πρῶτοι
Ἀθηναῖοι τόν τε σίδηρον κατέθεντο καὶ ἀνειμένῃ τῇ διαίτῃ ἐς
τὸ
τρυφερώτερον μετέστησαν. It was conflicting ideas that
drove Athens and Sparta into war. Doderlein says ‘demonstratur (in
this speech) non impotentia tantum et dominandi cupidine ad bellum
tam atrox tamque diutinum impulsos esse, sed etiam diversa recti
honestique aestimatione et constanti sui utrosque judicii
propugnatione.’
τοὺς ἰσοπαλεῖς κ
—Editors are not agreed as to the
meaning of these words; there are two interpretations: (1) ‘equal
dangers,’ i.e. dangers as great as any the
Spartans, for all their training, venture to face (so most edd.);
(2) ‘struggles in which equal, but not superior, forces oppose us.’
So Kr., Cl., Tillmanns. The general sense favours (1), the Greek
favours (2). According to (2), the reservation is implied ‘we do not
risk a battle against superior forces, as when the enemy invade
Attica.’
Τεκμήριον
—see c.
15,
3.
καθ’ ἑαυτούς
—i.e.
alone, without the help of their allies. καθ’
ἑκάστους is impossible because it would refer to
detachments of the Lacedaemonians: had
Πελοποννήσιοι stood in place of
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, it would have been right.
πάντων
—sc. τῶν
ξυμμάχων. αὐτοὶ
—‘by
ourselves.’ The words are arranged so that a great emphasis falls on κρατοῦμεν, up to which point, the exact
meaning of αὐτοὶ, which is
contrasted with μετὰ πάντων,
remains in doubt.
περὶ
— = ὐπὲρ,
as often in Isocr. and Demosth. Cf. c.
41,
5. Aristoph. Eq.
767
περὶ σοῦ
μάχομαι, 781, 1038.
τὰ πλείω
— cf. c.
11,
4 τὰ
πολλά.
Τε
—cf. c.
11,
4. This new fact has an important bearing on τὰ
πλείω κρατοῦμεν, enhancing the value of the victories, and
excusing the reverses.
ἐπὶ πολλὰ
—with
ἐπίπεμψιν. At the same time that we are busy with our
fleet, we have to send out our citizens on many expeditions by land.
ἡμῶν αὐτῶν
—i.e.
having no allies available.
ἐπίπεμψιν
— (see c.
14,
1) = διὰ
τὸ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν (‘partitive’)
ἐπιπέμπειν. αὐχοῦσιν
—poetical
word. Herod. II. 160. αὔχημα, very
rare in Attic, occurs in c.
62,
4.
ἀπεῶσθαι
—middle.
ὑφ’ ἁ. ἡσσῆσθαι
—c.
34,
6.
Καίτοι
—resumes the main thought which
was in- terrupted at τεκμήριον
δέ: ‘and surely.’
ῥαθυμίᾳ
—‘with a light heart.’ Cf. ἀνειμένως διαιτώμενοι above. Not in its
bad sense. Shil. quotes [Arist.]
Eth. VI. 1 οὔτε πλείω οὔτε ἐλάττω
πονεῖν οὐδὲ ῥᾳθυμεῖν. πόνων
—this
word had great significance to the Spartans and Thebans, denoting
the ‘training’ which they thought so necessary to success. It is
constantly used by Pindar, who holds that
πόνος and δαπανή
(‘outlay’) together win victory in the games. Observe the παρονομασία in πόνων,
νόμων, τρόπων. μετὰ ..
ἀνδρείας
—the
Spartan manliness is the result of military
rules, the Athenian of habit formed
through our mode of life.
ἀνδρείας belongs to both gens., and νόμων
ἀνδρείας, τρόπων ἀ. form a chiasmus with ῥαθυμίᾳ, πόνων μ. ἐθέλομεν
—‘omnes
recentioris aetatis pro ἐθέλοιμεν
scripserunt ἐθέλομεν.’ Wichmann.
Sta. thinks that Dion. Hal. really wrote the indic., and that this,
like other passages he quotes from Thuc., has been altered by
Byzantine scribes in his text. The critics ‘corrected’ Dionysius
from their MSS. of Thuc.
περιγίγνεται
—Dion. Hal. says Thuc. ought
to have written
περιέσται, because ἐθέλω
points to the fut., but there is no reference to time at all here,
and if there were the pres.
γίγνομαι can apply to the fut. Trans. ‘we are the
gainers.’
τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἀλγεινοῖς
—it is a question whether
the dat. is causal, ‘through coming
troubles,’ or dat. commodi, ‘for the sake
of.’ Probably it is causal.
ἐς αὐτὰ
—τὰ
ἀλ.
γεινὰ ‘when face to face with trouble.’ The καὶ is paratactic, ‘while,’ and the
verb, περιγίγνεται, is gradually
lost sight of, until we reach ἐν
ἄλλοις, which belongs rather to what follows. This is
a good example of Thuc.'s πολύνους
βραχυλογία. ἀτολμοτέρους
...
φαίνεσθαι
—with φαίνομαι Thuc. more often
omits than inserts the partic., where an adj. is used. Contrast c.
51,
3 σῶμα
αὔταρκες ὂν ἐφάνη.
Φιλοκαλοῦμεν
—these words have been
assidu- ously translated, paraphrased, and burlesqued. They not only
defend Athenian
ἀνδρεία, but contain sound advice to his hearers not
to let their love of art degenerate into bad taste and mere display,
nor their culture undermine their manliness.
εὐτελείας
—‘simplicity,’
avoidance of the gorgeous ornamentation that afterwards
characterised Asianism.
φιλοσοφοῦμεν
—‘combine culture with
manliness.’ Observe the
ἰσόκωλον (equal number of syllables in two clauses),
11 syllables on each side of
καί: this is a variety of
παρομοίωσις (Intr. p. lii.), and the παρονομασία in φιλοκαλοῦμεν,
φιλοσοφοῦμεν. ἄνευ
μαλακίας
—Demosth.
3, 24 and 25 has a passage probably suggested by this, in
which he contrasts the magnificence of the public buildings with the
simplicity of the private life in former times. Pericles refers to
the Spartan idea, that learning was unsuited to men of action. The
idea is not confined to Sparta.
πλούτῳ
—‘we employ our wealth as means
for action, not as a subject for boasting.’ Cf. c.
41,
2.
τὸ πένεσθαι
—put First,
because emphatic. ‘To admit poverty is no disgrace.’ Cf. c.
37,
1. There were penalties for idleness at Athens.
αἴσχιον
—another
γνώμη in the form of an
antithesis. Cf. c.
11,
5, and 2, 3 and 4 below. The comparative implies ‘even if poverty
were disgraceful (as some say).’ Plat.
Apol. p. 39 A μὴ ού τοῦτ’ ἦ?
χαλεπόν,
θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, ἀλλὰ πολὺ χαλεπώτερον πονηρίαν: the
first member must be negative in this idiom, in which opposition is
mixed with comparison. Cf. οὐδὲν
ἄλλο ...
ἀλλ’ ἢ in Plato.
Τοῖς αὐτοῖς
—sc.
ἡμῖν, all the citizens being meant. ‘In attending to our
private business, we do not neglect the state.’ It was Pericles'
object to induce all the citizens to take part in politics.
ἕτερα πρὸς ἔργα
—i.e.
trade, manufacture and agriculture.
τετραμμένοις
—c.
25,
2.
ἀπράγμονα
—to many,
πράγματα were tiresome. Cf. c.
64,
4, and Intr. p. lxxii.
αὐτοὶ
—‘we
in person,’ the citizens in the ecclesia, as contrasted with the
Spartan government, which was almost entirely in the hands of
the
Ephors and Gerusia.
ἤτοι κρίνομέν γε
—in Thuc., the more certain, but
less important alternative is put first when these particles are
used. But this does not seem to be the case in other authors. ‘At
any rate we are sound judges, if we cannot originate.’ This contains
an encouragement to the citizens to exercise their right of voting
in the ecclesia, since they were capable of pronouncing an opinion
on any policy proposed to them: but there are cases in which the
citizens conspicuously erred in their judgment. Here, as in other
parts, Pericles states his ideal of the
constitution.
ἐνθυμούμεθα
—of
the statesmen.
τοὺς λόγους
—alluding
to the ‘laconic’ brevity of the Spartans.
ἀλλὰ μὴ
—i.e.
μᾶλλον βλάβην
ἡγούμενοι μὴ προδιδαχθῆναι; the compar. as in 1 above.
προδιδαχθῆναι
—by
the orators, to whom, in after years, the people became
accustomed
to look for political guidance.
πρότερον ἢ
—for πρότερον
... πρίν, a very rare construction except in Herod.,
Thuc., and Antiphon. Cf. c.
65,
12.
ἢ ἐπὶ ἃ δεῖ ἔργῳ ἐλθεῖν
—i.e.
ἣ ἐργῷ ἐλθεῖν
ἐπὶ ἃ
δεῖ (ἔργῳ ἐλθεῖν).
Cf. Plat.
Phaedo, p. 114 B οἳ ἂν δόξωσι
διαφερόντως πρὸς τὸ
ὁσίως βιῶναι, i.e.
οἳ ἂν
δόξωσι διαφερόντως βιῶναι πρὸς τὸ ὁσίως (
βιῶναι), where, though Stallbaum's quotations are
irrevelant, his explanation is right, in spite of Archer-Hind's
objection. The verb really belongs to the 1st member, and is
‘understood’ with the 2nd.
ἐπὶ ... ἐλθεῖν
—cf.
ἐπεξελθεῖν of actions) (διεξελθεῖν
of words.
Ὥστε
—explains what precedes, as though
it were ὅτι τολμῶμεν.
ἐπιχειρήσομεν
—‘mean
to undertake.’
ἐκλογίζεσθαι
—sc.
μάλιστα, ‘give the fullest consideration.’
ὃ
— adverbial accus. ‘on the contrary.’
Cf. quod before si.
(This is the old explanation, that of Hudson; but it was generally abandoned in favour of the view that ὃ is nom., and to be explained by
anacoluthon. The edd. of the last decade have returned to the old
view, especially since 1883—Schneider in N.
Jahrb. '83, p. 457.) Cf. τὸ δέ.
It refers to the whole of the preceding sentence.
ψυχὴν
—only here in Thuc.= ‘spirit’;
elsewhere ‘life.’ Cl. compares εὔψυχος. οἱ κ.τ.λ. —this defines courage,
as distinct from
θράσος. Aristotle (
Eth. II. 2, 7) places the virtue ἀνδρεία midway between the vices δειλία and
θράσος. Cf. Plat. Protag. 351 A, Aristot. Eth.
III. 7, 11 fol.
δεινὰ
—of
the hardships of war.
ήδέα
—of
the pleasures of peace.
σαφέστατα
—courage is one of the four
cardinal virtues (justice, temperance, wisdom, and courage).
Socrates held that courage consists, not only in being used to
danger, but also in the
knowledge of good and evil.
μὴ ἀποτρεπόμενοι
—this sums up the
preceding sections, in which the statement φιλοσοφοῦμεν
ἄνευ
μαλακίας has been expanded. διὰ
ταῦτα=ὅμως.
Ἀρετὴν
—in its restricted sense, as
Aristot. Rhet. I. 9, 4,=the power of doing
good; not in the general sense of the
Ethics (= perfection of man and of his functions).
ἐνηντιώμεθα
—the perf. denotes ‘we have
always been unlike,’ a regular use of the perf. In Aristoph.
Av. 385 the MSS. give
ἠναντιώμεθα against the metre.
δρῶντες
—cf.
Pliny, Ep. III. 4, 6
conservandum
veteris
officii meritum novo videbatur.
τοὺς
—‘our.’
βεβαιότερος
—‘a firmer friend,’ cf. Aristot. Eth.
IX. 7, 2
οἱ εὖ πεποιηκότες φιλοῦσι καὶ
ἀγαπῶσι τοὺς εὖ πεπονθότας. ὸ
δράσας κ.τ.λ.—i.e.
ὁ δράσας τὴν χάριν ἐστι βεβαιότερος ὥστε
σῴζειν
τὴν
χάριν
ὀφειλομένην δῑ εὐνοίας ἐκείνου ᾧ δέδωκε τὴν χάριν.
Here, as often, ὥστε is inserted
where the simple infin. might have been used. Cf. c.
2,
4; Plat.
Protag. p. 338 C ἀδύνατον ὥστε
σοφώτερόν τιν’ ἑλέσθαι. τὴν χάριν
—regarded
from the side of both giver and recipient, thus combining the
meanings ‘favour’ and ‘gratitude,’ as with
gratia.
ὀφειλομένην
— ‘as due to him’ (i.e. to the giver).
ὀφειλομένην and
σῴζειν are connected, being properly used of property
given in trust to another's keeping. Plat. Rep.
I. p. 332 A compared with ib. p. 333 C.
δῑ εὐνοίας
—‘by
(the continuation of) his goodwill towards him to whom he showed
the
kindness.’
δέδωκε
—as in
Acts, 20, 35 μακάριόν
ἐστι μᾶλλον διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν. Livy, XXII. 13 sub fin.,
Sallust. Cat. 6, 5
σῴζειν
—as this means ‘to retain the
good-will or gratitude of his friends whom he has benefited,’ the
middle might be expected: but the object of the act. is to represent
the result of the benefit, not on the mind of the doer but on the
mind of the recipient; the doer is said to ‘keep safe’ what the
recipient ‘keeps safe’ for him, viz. τὴν
χάριν. ἀμβλύτερος
—‘more
indifferent.’ Is it not true?
ἐς
—‘as a.’ Cf. Andoc. II. 23 εἰς
χρήματα μεγάλας δωρέας. χάριν
—free
service which will win him gratitude.
χάρις, a free gift, is contrasted with ὀφείλημα, a loan, and so a debt.
τῆς ἐλευθερίας τῷ πιστῷ
— ‘the confidence due to our
liberal ideas.’ Cf. c.
37,
2
ἐλευθέρως. (Not ‘liberality.’)
ἀδεῶς
—‘without
fear,’ lest, by helping others, we should be injuring ourselves.
Τε
—sums
up the preceding remarks.
παίδευσιν
— not ‘school,’ but ‘liberal
education.’ Pericles represents Athens as the Ἑλλάδος
Ἑλλάς. Cf. Plat. Protag. 337 D Athens τῆς σοφίας πρυτανεῖον. Isocr. 15, 295 Athens πάντων τῶν
δυναμένων λέγειν ἢ παιδεύειν δοκεῖ γεγενῆσθαι διδάσκαλος.
Plat. Laws 641 E all Greeks consider Athens φιλόλογός τε καὶ πολύλογος. καθ’
ἕκαστον
—Athens as the
sum of all the citizens (τὴν
πᾶσαν), with a perfect
πολιτεία, is contrasted with the individuals, with their
perfect τρόποι. See c.
37,
1.
δοκεῖν ἄν
—this
ἄν, like the other two, belongs to
παρέχεσθαι. παρ’ ἡμῶν
—this
refers to
παίδευσιν, and represents the excellence of the
individual as proceeding from the spirit of the whole state.
ἐπὶ πλεῖστ’ ἂν εἴδη
—‘to
the most varied circumstances.’
μετὰ χαρίτων μάλιστα
εὐτραπέλως
—
i.e.
μάλιστα μετά τε
χαρίτων καὶ
εὐτραπέλως, ‘with the utmost grace and versatility.’
Probably Pericles had in mind the famous lines of Pindar, Pyth. I. 92 to end, μὴ
δολωθῆ?ς εὐτραπέλοις κέρδεσσ’, κ.τ.λ., and wished to show
that εὐτραπελία in the Athenian
character was a virtue.
τὸ σῶμα
—=
ἑαυτόν .
Ἐν τῷ παρόντι κόμπος
—‘passing
boast.’
τάδε
— see c.
42,
1.
δύναμις
—see c.
36,
4.
σημαίνει
—cf. Antiphon,
Tetr.
Γ. γ, 3 ὡς οὐδὲ
τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἠμύνατο αὐτόν, αὐτὸ τὸ ἔργον σημαίνει. See
c.
15,
4.
Τῶν νῦν
—sc.
πόλεων. ἀκοῆς κρείσσων
—‘superior
to what men have heard of her.’
ἐς πεῖραν ἔρχεται
—‘proves
herself in the hour of trial.’
τῷ πολεμίῳ
—collective.
[
ἐπελθόντι
]—spurious, for (1) it destroys
the balance to τῷ ὑπηκόῳ, (2) the
sense requires that enemies in general should be referred to, not
merely enemies who attack Athens; nor could Pericles mean that
Athens never attacked anyone.
ἔχει
—=
παρέχει. Cf. c.
61,
2.
οἵων
—i.e.
φαύλων. οὐχ ὑπ’ ἀξίων
—=ὑπ’ ἀναξίων, the neg. preceding
the prep. as usual. Contrast c.
49,
3.
Σημείων
—‘clear proofs,’
viz. in the results of Athenian activity.
οὐ
δή τοι—δὴ as in c.
40,
3, emphasizing οὐ ‘by no means,’
while τοι ‘assuredly’ also belongs
to
οὐ. ἀμάρτυρον
—‘without witnesses,’ since
all contemporaries, and above all her enemies knew her greatness
from her acts in every land and sea. The word has its forensic
sense, as used of a plea supported only by the
speaker's own testimony.
τοῖς τε νῦν
—agent; this disappears in later
Attic, except in the cases already noticed. See c.
7,
2.
καὶ
—at the beginning of a parenthesis.
See c.
2,
4.
Ὁμήρου
—i.e. not
needing a poet to exaggerate our history. Of course Thuc. did not
object to Homer as a poet, but only as a historian.
ὅστις
— i.e.
ποιητής. A similar change to a relative
clause is not uncommon in Isocrates;
e.g. 5, 153 τοὺς
μὴ μόνον κεχαρισμένως διειλεγμένους, ἀλλ’ οἵτινες ἂν οὕτω
ποιήσωσι
τὰς
σὰς πράξεις θαυμάζειν ὡς οὐδενὸς ἄλλου. (The view that
Pericles is intended to reprove Homer for saying so little of the
‘sons of Theseus’ is quite untenable.)
ἔπεσι
—‘poetry.’
τὸ αὐτίκα
—‘for the moment.’ Cf. I. 21
οὔτε ὡς
ποιηταὶ ὑμνήκασι πιστεύων, οὔτε ὡς λογογράφοι ξυνέθεσαν ἐπὶ
τὸ
προσαγωγότερον τῆ? ἀκροάσει ἢ ἀληθέστερον. The
mythical element in early Greek history was due to the influence of
epic. See Intr. C. III. init.
τῶν δὲ ἔργων
—the influence of the rel. is
here lost, on the principle of c.
4,
5, 34, 5. The μὲν
aud δὲ are paratactic. The gen.
belongs equally to ὑπόνοιαν and ἀλήθεια. ὑπόνοιαν
—‘the
conception of the facts,’ aroused by poetry. So
ὑπονοεῖν ‘to conjecture.’
ἡ ἀλήθεια
—i.e.
the knowledge gained from investigation of the facts.
ἀλλὰ
—antithesis to οὐ ... παρασχόμενοι. καλῶν
τε
κἀγαθῶν
—the
MSS. κακῶν is explained to mean
‘of the harm and of the good we have done.’ For κακῶν cf.
κακοπαθεῖ above. But Pericles is talking of Atheniau
prowess, not contrasting the harm done to her enemies with
the benefits conferred on her friends: nor is ἀγαθὰ ‘benefits’ here, but ‘acts of
valour,’ which of course inflict harm on enemies. Nor is the
reference to the Greek estimate of
εὐτυχία, as a compound of good and ill, for which see
c.
44,
1: for Pericles is here dealing not with
τύχη, but with Athenian γνώμη.
The substitution of κακῶν for καλῶν in this phrase, even if it made
sense, would be a miserable joke.
ξυγκατοικίσαντες
—
i.e. while opening the whole world to our prowess, we have
at the same time everywhere established monuments of that prowess,
in colonies and states made subject to us, and in the scenes of many
brave actions.
Περὶ
—c.
39,
2.
τοιαύτης
—this word sums up the whole of
the ἔπαινος A, and prepares the
way for ἔπαινος B.
δικαιοῦν
—an Ionic and old Attic word,
used once by Plato,
Laws, p. 934 A. Its usual sense is that of ἀξιοῦν, but sometimes it = ‘to punish.’
οἵδε .. μὴ ἀφαιρεθῆναι αὐτὴν
—the clue to the construction
is οὐκ ἀφαιροῦμαι τούσδε τὴν πόλιν. τῶν λειπομένων
—c.
2,
4.
εἰκὸς
—c.
10,
1.
ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς
— repeats περὶ ... πόλεως.
κάμνειν
—an
exhortation to persevere in spite of the hardships of the war.
Διὸ δὴ καὶ
—‘this
is the very reason why.’
τῆς πόλεως
—in preference to τῶν ἀνδρῶν, (1) to encourage his
listeners (2) because the clearest proof of the greatness of the
Atbenians was the greatness of Athens herself.
περὶ ἴσου
—‘for an equal prize.’ Kr.
quotes Dem. 8, 60
οὐχ
ὑπὲρ τῶν
ἴσων ὑμῖν τε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἔσθ’ ὁ κίνδυνος. (κινδυνεύειν, ἀγωνίζεσθαι and so forth,
with περί, ὑπέρ or
ἕνεκα are common in the orators. In Andoc. I. 10 εἰς
τὸν ἀγῶνα τόνδε
κατέστην, περὶ τῶν μυστηρίων ὡς οὔτε μοι ἠσέβηται, the
comma should be placed after
μυστηρίων .)
τῶνδε
—referring to what precedes. In
speeches ὅδε is fairly often used
thus of οὗτος. Cf.
40, 2, 60, 6,
63, 2, 71, 3, 72,
1, 3. The meaning was aided by gesture and emphasis, so that the use
is akin to the deictic
ὅδε. The phrase οὔτως
εἶχεν frequently refers to what follows in the
orators. Antiphon 6, 9 and 14, Isocr. 4,
163.
μηδὲν
—hypothetical
rel., so that every nation is included, though Pericles has
Sparta
in his mind.
ὁμοίως
—this, like
μηδέν, softens the expression and makes it vaguer. It
also increases the force of the exhortation κἀμνειν
ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως, by increasing the number of states with
which Athens is contrasted.
ἐφ’ οἷς
—for τούτων
ἐφ’ οἷς. Cf. c.
34,
6.
σημείοις
—approaches very near the sense
of παραδείγμασι: the manifest
proofs are the acts in which the fallen had a share.
Καὶ
—‘and
in fact.’
ὕμνησα
—originally of poetic praise, then
of a panegyric in prose. Plat. Repub. 364 A.
αἱ τῶνδε
—sc.
ταῦτα, their
deeds justify my words; for ‘they
added fresh lustre to the glories which I praised in our city’:
therefore, in speaking the praises of the city, I was praising them.
The sense is τὰ
τῆς πόλεως ἃ ὕμνησα, ταῦτα ἐκεῖνοι ἐκόσμησαν ταῖς ἀρεταῖς.
L. and S. wrongly supply τὴν πόλιν,
with several edd., to ἐκόσμησαν.
ἀρεταὶ
—‘valiant
deeds.’
οὐκ ἂν
—the whole result of this sentence
is positive, but the idiom by which the verb after οὐχ ὥσπερ agrees with the thing in the
simile and not the thing compared, has nothing to do with this
passage. (Plat.
Gorg. 522 A ἀπορεῖν
ποιεῖ,
οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐγὼ
ηὐώχουν ὑμᾶς .)
πολλοῖς
—ethic dat., and equivalent here
to πολλῶν, but preferred because
of the gen. following. ‘There are few Greeks of whom it could be
said that tbe report of their deeds does not do more than balance
the reality.’
τῶνδε
—depends on
λόγος. τῷ ἔργῳ
—=τῶν
ἔργων τῆ? ἀληθείᾳ c.
41,
4.
ἀνδρὸς ἀρετὴν
—‘virtue
in a man.’
πρώτη τε
—=εἴτε
πρώτη μηνύει εἴτε τελευταία βεβαιοῖ. For some, especially
the younger men, their death was the first
μηνυτὴς of the worth which they had not had a previous
chance of showing; for others it was but the final confirmation of
what had been amply proved before.
καταστροφή
— Soph. O.
C. 103: meiosis for death.
Τοῖς τἆλλα χείροσι
—not referring to any among
the dead, but purely hypothetical, and intending to lead to a
conclusion a fortiori. If men who have often
proved themselves base can by one act rehabilitate themselves, how
much more are these men noble who never in any case sbrank from
danger? The dat. depends on δίκαιόν
(
ἐστι ).
προτίθεσθαι
— =
προτιμᾶσθαι (see 4 below), pass.
They may have preferred wealth and ease to serving their
country: in estimating them, we must prefer
their one great sacrifice.
ἀφανίσαντες
—so
that not the least trace of their failings remains.
ὠφέλησαν
—the aor. are gnomic.
ἐκ τῶν ἰδιῶν
—‘through
their private life.’ Pericles is thinking of the indifference to
state affairs against which he warns his hearers. See Intr. p.
lxxiii.
Τὴν ἔτι
—‘the
continued enjoyment’ of wealth.
πενίας ἐλπίδι, ὡς .. αὐτὴν
—=οὔτε
ἐλπίδι, ὡς διαφυγὼν τὴν πενίαν κἂν
ἔτι
πλουτήσειεν. But πενίας
is attracted to
ἐλπίδι because of the antithesis to πλούτῳ. ἔτι
—some
day, as in prophecies and threats.
πλουτήσειεν
—ingressive.
ἀναβολὴν ἐποίησατο
—these periphrases
will be found collected in the index,
s.v.
ποιεῖσθαι.
ποθεινοτέραν
—a strong
word used of things that are desirable.
ποθεῖν is the regular word in oratory to describe the
supposed anxiety of tbe hearers to have information on any point. Antiph. 5, 64; Andoc.
1, 70; Lys. 14. 1; Isocr. 12,
167; 15, 43; Isaeus 11, 19; Dem. 4,
28; 21, 77; 50, 43; Aeschin. 2,
7 and 44.
αὐτῶν
—again a loose reference to what
has been described, here = πλούτου
ὴ ἔτι ἀπόλαυσις and τὸ ἔτι
πλουτῆσαι. λαβόντες
—=ὑπολαβόντες, as ‘I take it’ is
used by us for ‘I suppose.’ Often in Thuc.
μετ’ αὐτοῦ
—sc. τοῦ
κινδύνου. It goes with
ἐφίεσθαι also.
τῶν δὲ
—viz. the
enjoyment and the hope: ‘to face this danger in exacting vengeance
before tbey indulged in these hopes.’ The chief emphasis is on μετ’ αὐτοῦ. (Only Bh., Kraz and Ste.
among recent edd. retain
ἐφίεσθαι ).
ἐλπίδι μὲν
—the construction differs from
that of ἔργῳ, which is adverbial.
τοῦ κατορθώσειν
—the fut. is due to the
prominence of tbe idea of futurity here. Cf. c.
13,
9. The infin. approximates in these cases to its use in Oratio Obliqua, in that the writer allows the
thought of the person to whom he refers to influence the tense (ἀφανές ἐστιν εἰ κατορθώσομεν). It is
characteristic of Thuc. to present an action as it was regarded by
the actors themselves. M. T. 113.
ἔργῳ
—‘but in the task actually before
them at the moment, tbey resolved to trust to themselves’: i.e. the future must be left to τύχη (Providence); the present required γνώμη. ἐν
αὐτῷ
—what can
this be but the act just described, i.e.
ἐν τῷ ... σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πεποιθέναι? The
sense is ‘in carrying out their resolution,’ i.e.
in the struggle itself.
τὸ ἀμύνεσθαι καὶ παθεῖν
—cf. Isocr.
2, 36
ἢν
δ’ ἀναγκασθῆ?ς
κινδυνεύειν, αἱροῦ τεθνάναι καλῶς μᾶλλον ἢ ζῆν αἰσχρῶς.
4, 95 τοῖς καλοῖς κἀγαθοῖς αἱρετώτερόν
ἐστι
καλῶς
ἀποθανεῖν ἢ
ζῆν αἰσχρῶς. Intr. p. xl.
τὸ αἰσχρὸν τοῦ λόγου
—
i.e.
τὸ ὀνειδίζεσθαι ὡς δειλοί
(Schol.).
ἔφυγον
—antithesis to ὑπέμειναν, as very often, e.g.
Lys. 13, 27
and 63.
τὸ ἔργον
—=τὸν
κίνδυνον. δῑ ἐλαχίστου
καιροῦ τύχης
—human γνώμη is often crossed by
divine τύχη, and in this case was
so modified that their highest hopes were not realised. The edd.
quote Horace Sat. I. 1, 7 horae
momento
cita
mors venit aut victoria laeta, but horae
momento denotes a far greater length of time, and does not take
in τύχης. But this sentence, the
close of the ἔπαινος τῶν
ἀποθανόντων, in its intense solemnity, resembles (mutatis mutandis) the words of St. Paul (1 Cor. 15, 52, 54) ‘We shall all be
changed in a moment, in the twinkling of an eye. ... O grave, wbere
is thy victory? O death, where is thy sting?’ So here Pericles
refers to the rapidity and sud denness with which τύχη acts. Hence ‘in a moment ordained
by Fate, at the crisis not of fear but of glory—they passed.’
(Behrendt rightly objects to Steup's proposal.)
ἀπηλλάγησαν
—absolute, a poetical use.
Dr. Kennedy (Cam. Phil.
Proceedings 1882, p. 20 fol.) well says that the speaker's
voice ‘sinks to the sad and solemn cadence of
ἀπηλλάγησαν.’ Supply τοῦ
βίου .
Καὶ
—‘and thus.’ Here the πίστις B is summed up, preparatory to
passing on to the
προτροπή (exhortation).
προσηκόντως τῇ πόλει
—‘in
a manner worthy of Athens.’
τοὺς λοιποὺς
—=τοὺς
λειπομένους of 41, 5.
ἀσφαλεστέραν
— sc.
διάνοιαν, though they should pray for a spirit less
fatal (in its results). This again shows that τύχη had, in Pericles' view, to some
extent crossed the purpose of the fallen.
εὔσεσθαι
—for
ἀσφάλεια is the gift of God alone. Cf. c.
87,
3.
εὐτολμία depends on human resolution.
λόγῳ
—i.e. from
the words of the orator.
ὠφελίαν
—explained in ὅσα ... ἀγαθὰ ἔνεστιν. (On the
orthography, Herodian remarks ὠφέλεια·
ποιητικώτερον διὰ τὸ ι— καὶ παροξύνεται .)
ἣν
—with
μηκύνοι. Cf. c.
42,
1.
πρὸς
—coram, with
a verb of speaking. See c.
5,
7. Cf. III. 53,
4 πρὸς εἰδότας πάντα λελέξεται. καθ’
ἡμέραν
—this
daily contemplation of the greatness of Athens will lead to a
lasting love for her: and that love should be an incentive to noble
actions.
τολμῶντες
—‘by courage, by knowing what was their duty, and by their sense
of
honour in the hour of conflict.’
αὐτὰ
—i.e.
τὴν δύναμιν, but expressing the details
of the power. Cf. c. 1. οὖν
—‘on
that account.’
κάλλιστον
—because,
while they contributed to the advancement of the state, they
obtained a splendid return.
ἔρανον
—‘contribution’; both the association and the money subscribed to it were
termed ἔρανος, which denotes
combination for financial purposes of whatever kind. The object is τὴν ἀρετήν, κ. ἔρανον being predicate.
προιέμενοι
—stronger than the ordinary ἔρανον ἐσφέρειν, and used because it is
the regular word for
sacrificing anything for the state; e.g.
Lysias 21, 12 ὑμῖν οὐδὲν προεῖνται τῶν
σφετέρων αὐτῶν .
Κοινῇ ... ἰδίᾳ
—the
antithesis is as obvious as it is forcible. They gave their
lives
for the common good; they gained for themselves undying fame.
γὰρ
—Pericles refers to the distribution
of profits made by a financial ἔρανος.
(All this is quite clear when Andoc. I. 133-135 is compared: he
speaks of the members of an ἔρανος
got up by Agyrrhius to farm the tax on imports and exports; the
object of the business-men who joined it was διανείμασθαι
τὰ κοινά.)
τὸν ἀγήρων ἔπαινον
—the
praise (which rewards good deeds).
ἐλάμβανον
—the tense represents the
result of the act (
διδόντες) as growing out of the act itself, as in Lat.
ita vitas dederunt ut acciperent, contrasted
with ita vitas dederunt ut
acceperint.
ἐπισημότατον
—the
pred. serves to connect the adj. with the rel. clause which
follows.
οὐκ ... μᾶλλον, ἀλλ’
—cf. c.
40,
1; 44, 4; ἀλλὰ
for ἢ (only after a
neg.) gives greater emphasis to the second clause.
παρὰ τῷ ἐντυχόντι ... καιρῷ
—a curious expression, since παρὰ with dat. is confined to persons; ‘on every fitting occasion, whether
by word or deed.’ This construction is only found when the thing is
almost
personified; here αἰείμνηστος
παρὰ
καιρῷ λόγου implies persons: in c.
89,
9 and VIII. 95,
4 Thuc. writes παρὰ
ταῖς ναυσὶν εἶναι, in v. 26,
5 γενομένῳ παρ’ ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγμασι.
There is only one case in the orators, viz.
Andoc. I. 116 ὴ στήλη παρ’ ᾗ ἕστηκας
κελεύει .
Σημαίνει
—c.
8,
3. Cf. v. 20,
2 ἐς τὰ προγεγενημένα σημαίνει. ἄγραφος
μνήμη
—cf. c.
38,
3, which shows that by τῆς γνώμης κ.τ.λ.
is meant ‘engraved on the heart rather than in material records.’
The difficulty is to explain the art. with
ἔργου; it is due to στηλῶν
above, the records having been referred to in that word. As the
memory is carried in men's hearts, it is confined to no particular
country.
Τὸ εὔδαιμον ... τὸ δὲ ἐλεύθερον
—predicates,
the art. being added because the adj. is used as a noun.
μὴ περιορᾶσθε
—‘do not be too anxious
about the dangers of war’; the advice is the result of the doctrine
‘happiness is attained by courage,—by retaining a cheerful spirit in
peril,’ which cheerfulness Pericles claims to be characteristic of
the Athenians as the result of their free institutions (39, 4), and now urges them to retain in the
war.
Οὐ γὰρ
—a paradox: misery is identical
with cowardice, since cowardice must involve
misery. Therefore those who are prosperous must
avoid cowardice (
i.e. be ready to sacrifice their lives), whereas to those
who are already miserable cowardice involves no addition to their
misery. This decides the meaning of
περιορᾶσθε above.
ἡ ἐναντία μεταβολὴ
—‘the
change from good to bad fortune.’
κινδυνεύεται
—c.
35,
1.
ἐν οἷς
—‘in
whose case.’
μάλιστα
— ‘in comparison with others,’ as
often. Cf. c.
49,
1, and μᾶλλον ἑτέρων. τὰ
διαφέροντα
—‘the
difference.’
Μετὰ τοῦ
—cf. I. 6,
5; VI. 65,
1. ‘Cowardice and disgrace together.’
κάκωσις
—=ἡ
ἐναντία μεταβολὴ above, according to the doctrine that
cowardice is misery, and therefore to the prosperous involves
degradation: κάκωσις·
ταπείνωσις Hesych.
μετὰ ῥώμης
—‘when he is fired by courage
and the general hope,’ viz. that his side
will win.
ἀναίσθητος
—
‘painless.’
Διόπερ
—‘This is the reason why,’ viz. because in their death they were
εὐδαίμονες, or, as he says presently, εὐτυχεῖς. νῦν
—belongs
to τῶνδε=τῶν
νῦν θαπτομένων, and inserted because since the γνώμη with which
43,
3 opened, Pericles had been generalising.
τοκέας
—poetical, for γονέας. πάρεστε
—contrast
ἐπίστανται below: cf. c.
11,
1. It is clear that the Greek orators interchanged direct address
and reflection more rapidly than we can do.
πολυτρόποις
—of
experiences as varied as those of Odysseus.
τὸ δ’ εὐτυχὲς
—sc.
ἐστίν; here follows a remarkable definition of
εὐτυχία. Intr. p. xl. fol.
οἳ ἂν
—cf. c.
62,
4.
τῆς εὐπρεπεστάτης
—belongs both to τελευτῆς and
λύπης. ‘This is good fortune, to have gained an honourable
death, like theirs, or an honourable grief, like yours.’ With ὑμεῖς supply
ὥσπερ. καὶ οἷς
—the
change from οἳ ἂν shows that
Pericles is not now speaking generally, but referring to the fallen
particularly, so that οἷς ...
ξυνεμετρήθη=οἷς ἂν ὥσπερ
τοῖσδε ξυμμετρηθῇ. ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι
—=εὐδαιμονῆσαι
ἐν αὐτῷ (i.e.
τῷ βίῳ). Infin. of purpose. Intr. p.
xli.
ἐνταλαιπωρῆσαι
—‘whose life has been
meted out to prosper in and to suffer in alike,’
i.e. ‘they may be deemed happy in whose life prosperity and
adversity are equally balanced.’ A philosophical definition of human
εὐτυχία, for which cf. Pindar, Pyth.
7, 20 φαντί
γε μὰν
οὕτω κεν ἀνδρὶ παρμονίμαν θάλλουσαν εὐδαιμονίαν τὰ καὶ τὰ
φέρεσθαι: that man, says Pericles, is happy who has τὰ καὶ
τὰ in equal proportions. (Alii
alia, says Herw.: those who do not like this explanation
will find others elsewhere. Sta. reads ἐντελευτῆσαι
{ἡ εὐδαιμονία} ξυν.)
Μὴ} ποθεῖν ... ὑπομνήματα
—cf. the Funeral Oration attributed to Demosth. 16 ὥσπερ
ἴχνη γνωρίζουσα νῦν ἡ τῶν οἰκείων αὐτοῖς καὶ φίλων μνήμη
πᾶσαν
ὥραν
ἐπὶ τούτους φέρεται τῷ πόθῳ, πόλλ’ ὑπομνήματα λαμβάνουσα.
Plat. Rep. I. p. 329 A τὰς
ἐν τῆ? νεότητι
ἡδονὰς ποθοῦντες καὶ ἀναμιμνῃσκόμενοι. Add Andoc. I.
70 εἴ τίς τι ὑμῶν ποθεῖ. ἀναστὰς
ὑπομνησάτω (if A desiderat aliquid
which B is able and willing to give to him, A naturally reminds B of
it; conversely, if D has something, which C has lost, and cannot
give it to C, but cannot help reminding C of it, D naturally feels
desiderium,
πόθος).
ὧν
— = αὐτοὺς ὧν. καὶ πολλάκις
—‘only
too often.’
εὐτυχίαις
— related to εὐτυχία or τὸ
εὐτυχές as
τύχαι or τὰ τῆς τύχης
to τύχη,
i.e. the plur. denotes instances of
good luck rather than good luck in the abstract. This refers back to τὸ
εὐτυχὲς above: for, though a man cannot be judged
prosperous till after his death, still instances of good luck may of
course occur in life, and if these are as frequent as the
misfortunes of life, the whole result will be τὸ εὐτυχές. Cf. Soph.
frag.
οὐ χρή ποτ’ εὖ
πράσσοντος
ὀλβίσαι τύχας | ἀνδρός,
πρὶν
αὐτῷ
παντελῶς
ἤδη βίος | διεκπερανθῇ καὶ
τελευτήσῃ βίον. Pericles refers especially to the noble
deeds of sons who will thus bring joy to their parents. Cf.
43, 4.
αἷς
—cf. Isocr.
14,
47
ἢν ὡς εὖ πράττοντας ἔλθωμεν,
ἔτι χαλεπώτερον ἔχομεν, οὐ ταῖς ἐκείνων φθονοῦντες εὐπορίαις ἀλλὰ
μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς τῶν πέλας ἀγαθοῖς τὰς ἡμετέρας αὐτῶν συμφορὰς
καθορῶντες. λύπη
—sc. ἐστίν, ‘a man feels sorrow,
not for the want of blessings which he loses before he knows them.’ ὧν is governed by both partic. and
verb.
πειρασάμενος
—c.
5,
5.
οὗ ἂν
—a conspicuous instance of the rule
referred to on c.
13,
2; the gen. depends on ἐθάς, while ἀφαιρεθῇ would take accus. The change
from ὧν to
οὗ is another instance of irregularity in the form of rel.
clauses.
ἐθας
—synonym of
ἠθἀς, Soph.
El. 372; both forms appear in the ancient
lexica: probably ἐθὰς does not
occur elsewhere in Attic prose.
Καρτερεῖν
—(sometimes joined with ὑπομένειν). See c.
61,
2.
τέκνωσιν π
—=
παιδοποιεῖσθαι. τῶν οὐκ
ὄντων
—=τῶν τεθνηκότων. λήθη
—‘cause
of forgetfulness.’
ἔκ τε .. καὶ ἀσφαλείᾳ
—these give the two grounds
referred to in διχόθεν; for the
variety of construction, cf. c.
36,
4; I. 138,
2, μὴ ἐρημοῦσθαι, by means of the
soldiers and citizens she would acquire;
ἀσφαλείᾳ, by the increased anxiety of the parents to
benefit the state, as explained in the next sentence.
ξυνοίσει
—sc. τὸ
παῖδας ἐπιγίγνεσθαι. Cf. c.
3,
3.
ἴσον τι ἢ δίκαιον
—equal, in the sense of
‘democratic,’ conforming to the equality that characterises the
Athenian polity; cf. c.
37,
1: just, in the sense of ‘regular’ or ‘sober,’ in accordance with a
sane judgment of religion and politics.
ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου
—=
ὁμοίως, equally with otbers. Adverbial phrases with
ἐκ and an adj. are common in Thuc., who has ἐκ τοῦ
προφανοῦς, ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ, ἐκ τοῦ εὐθέος,
ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος, ἐκ τοῦ
εὐπρεποῦς, ἐκ τοῦ
αἰσχίονος,
ἐκ
τοῦ δικαίου, ἐξ ἴσου, and others. This one occurs also I. 143,
4, and elsewhere. One or two of these phrases were colloquial, as ἐξ ἴσου, ἐξ ἑνὸς (
τρόπου or λόγου ), ἐκ παντὸς (
τρόπου) (these are the only ones
found in Aristoph.); the rest are formed on the analogy of such
simple phrases. The orators use them, but only with common
adjectives: Thuc. confines them to speeches and highly-wrought
passages. The 8th book contains only three examples.
παραβαλλόμενοι
—discrimini
objicientes: a dictionary may here be useful to some. To have
children in peril would constitute having a stake in the state.
Παρηβήκατε
—antithesis to οἷς ἔτι ἡλικία. κέρδος
—
predicate, in an unexpected place, and so emphatic.
τόνδε
—‘your present life,’ i e. your sorrow will be short-lived, because
your lives are drawing to a close.
τὸ φιλότιμον
—
‘love of honour,’ which would be gratified in their case, as
they
would be honoured on account of their children's fame.
ἐν τῷ ἀχρείῳ τῆς ἡλικίας
—cf. c.
40,
2, = ἐν τῷ γήρᾳ. τὸ
κερδαίνειν
... τὸ τιμᾶσθαι
—a
true description of the ‘last infirmity’ of base and noble minds
respectively.
ἀλλὰ
—c.
40,
1, 43, 2.
Εἴρηται
—the act. or pass perf. is often
used thus in bringing a speech to a close (Lys 12, the case referred
to by Aristotle at the close of the Rhet. is
an example; so probably Eur. Hec. 236. Cf.
dixi.) Hence it is made prominent.
καὶ ἐμοὶ
—Shil. rightly explains this as
connected with καὶ
ἔργῳ, the sense being καὶ
λόγῳ
ἐμοὶ εἴρηται καὶ ἔργῳ
οἱ θ. κεκόσμηνται. ‘I have done my duty in delivery of
the oration, the city has in deed partly done hers and is prepared
to do more.’
κατὰ τὸν νόμον .. πρόσφορα
—a modest description of
what had been a metaphysical exposition of the relation of politics
to character. Cf. Burke,
Reflections, ‘I am unable to distinguish what I have
learned from others from the results of my own meditation.’
αὐτῶν
—cf. c.
27,
1. Its position gives it the force of a dat. of interest.
μέχρι ἥβης
—to
the age of eighteen.
θρέψει
—of people) (
βόσκειν of cattle. βόσκειν
is only used of people contemptuously, except by Herod., and Thuc.,
who uses the word once, VII. 48
ναυτικὸν
πολὺ βόσκοντας: even there the notion of irksomeness
comes in.
ὠφέλιμον
—something
more than a mere distinction.
τοῖσδε
—the fallen, τοῖς
λειπομένοις ‘the survivors,’ as in
41, 5.
ἀγώνων
—with
στέφανον, like τροπαῖον μάχης.
προτιθεῖσα
—‘offering.’
οἷς
—in
general relation to the whole, ‘among whom.’
τοῖς δὲ
—cf. c.
65,
5, δὲ in apodosis.
)Απολοφυράμενοι
—the
ὀλόφυρσις was part of the regular ceremony, and took
place at the conclusion of the speech. [Lys.]
Epitaph. end, ἀνάγκη τοῖς
ἀρχαίοις
ἔθεσι χρῆσθαι, καὶ
θεραπεύοντας τὸν
πάτριον νόμον ὀλοφύρεσθαι τοὺς θαπτομένους. The
Menex. ends thus, τοὺς
τετελευτηκότας
ἀπολοφυράμενοι
ἄπιτε, and [Demosth.] Epitaph.
ἀποδυράμενοι
... ἄπιτε. ‘When you have finished (probably aor., as Sta. says, not
ἀπο‐, gives this force) your lamentation.’
προσήκει
—sc.
ἀπολοφυρεσθαι.
ἀποχωρεῖτε
—Intr.
p. xxxii. There is no doubt about the reading because χωρεῖν was much less familiar to the
copyists than ἰέναι, and the
scholia sometimes explain the former by the latter.
Τοιόσδε
—see c.
41,
2. Late authors make no dis- tinction between these pronouns.
τάφος
—contrast the meaning in 34, 4.
ἐγένετο
—pass. of ταφὰς
ἐποιήσαντο, c.
34,
1.
πρῶτον
—Thuc.
never inserts the art. in these formulae.
Τὰ δύο μέρη
—limiting
apposition. The arrangements for the campaign are exactly the same
as tbose of the pre ceding year, though the Spartans
now knew that the Athenians would not offer battle. It is clear
therefore that Sparta too saw that the only hope was to wear Athens
out. Cf. Intr. p. lxx.
καθεζόμενοι
—c.
18,
1.
Ἡ νόσος
—‘the famous plague.’ The account
(c. 47-54) falls into three parts, (i) its
origin (47, 48), (ii) symptoms
and effects
on sufferers (49, 50), (iii) effects on
morality (51, etc.). This description
has been imitated by many writers, as Lucretius VI. 1138-1251 who is
in turn imitated by Vergil,
Georg. III, 478 and Ovid, Met. VII.
523), Procopius,
Persica II, 22, who describes the plague at Constantinople
in Justinian's reign, A.D. 542, and John Cantacuzene, Emperor of the
Eastern Empire, who described very poorly the great plague of 1347
with which the plague of Florence described by Boccaccio and the
‘Black Death’ in England are connected. Superstitious horror,
followed by demoralisation, is common to all great plagues.
πρῶτον ἤρξατο
—cf. c.
36,
1, 48, 1.
γενέσθαι
—the phrase occurs also I. 103
τὸ μῖσος
ἤρξατο γενέσθαι, c.
68,
2, III. 18
ὁ χειμὼν ἤρχετο γίγνεσθαι , Isocr. 15, 82
ἤρχετο
τὸ γένος
τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γίγνεσθαι, Andoc.
2,
9
ἤρχετο γίγνεσθαι
δυσδαιμονἐστερος. The tense of
γίγνομαι must be the same as that of
ἄρχομαι; yet ἤρξατο
πρἀσσειν is good Greek, though ἤρχετο
πρᾶξαι is not (the reason is that
γίγνομαι is
inceptive, while
πράσσω is not, so that ἤρξατο
γίγνεσθαι would be a contradiction in terms; thus ἤρξατο
γιγνώσκειν would not do).
λεγόμενον
—as though
νόσημα had preceded.
ἐγκατασκῆψαι
—Soph. O.
T. 27 ἐν δ’ ὁ πυρφόρος θεός | σκήψας ἐλαύνει, λοιμὸς ἔχθιστος πάλιν. περὶ
—circa: c.
7,
3.
οὕτως
—with
γενέσθαι.
ἐμνημονεύετο
—
anacoluthon. as λεγόμενον μὲν
preceded. (Observe that this is not a solecism.) Cf. c.
65,
11.
Τὸ πρῶτον
—with
θεραπεύοντες, ‘as they treated it at first with no
knowledge of its nature.’
μάλιστα .. ὅσῳ καὶ μάλιστα
—
i.e. the mortality among them was greater than among any
other class because they came in contact with the disease more than
others. For the double superl. or compar. in proportion, cf. I. 68
προσήκει ἡμᾶς οὐχ ἥκιστα εἰπεῖν, ὁσῳ καὶ
μέγιστα
ἐγκλήματα ἔχομεν, III. 45
οὐχ ἧσσον τὰς πόλεις, ὅσῳ περὶ μεγίστων
, V. 90
πρὸς ὑμῶν
οὐχ ἧσσον τοῦτο, ὅσῳ καὶ ἐπὶ μεγίστῃ τιμωρίᾳ ἂν παράδειγμα
γένοισθε. Cf. also c.
11,
1 καὶ ἐπὶ πόλιν δυνατωτάτην ... καὶ αὐτοὶ
πλεῖστοι ἐρχόμεθα. πρὸς
ἱεροῖς
—ad loca sacra; cf. c.
87,
6, 94, 4.
ἱκέτευσαν
—the aor. sums up all the
instances (complexive).
ἐχρήσαντο
—sc.
ὅσα, which with
ἱκέτευσαν =ὅσας
ἱκετείας, but with
ἐχρήσαντο=περὶ ὅσα.
See L. and S. χράω A. III.
τε
—does not belong to the preceding τε, which added a third fact to οὔτε
οὔτε, but=‘and so.’
ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ
—cf. 51,
1; but contrast 60, 6 χρήμασι
νικώμενος. The verbs which commonly have ὑπὸ with things in prose are such as νικῶμαι,
βλάπτομαι,
διαφθείρομαι, ἀναγκάζομαι, ἡττῶμαι, πείθομαι (Isaeus
only has πείθομαι and
διαφθείρομαι, Lysias only ἀναγκἀζομαι,
ἐπαίρομαι, διἀκειμαι) and the things so used must be such
as can be easily personified, such as (1) natural
phenomena, as χειμών, σεισμός,
ἄπλοια, (2) external circumstances,
as κίνδυνος, συμφορά, πληγαί, δεσμοί,
κέρδος,
χρήματα, νόμος, (3) emotions,
as ἡδον ή, φθόνος, (4) words
which imply a person, as λόγοι,
πράγματα, δύναμις, when the person is often inserted (as
in ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ ῥήτορος δενότητος),
and all the topics of rhetoric as ὑπὸ
τῶν
εἰκότων,
ὑπὸ τοῦ δικαίου. The construction is
optional in these cases, as the following examples show: Aristoph.
Av. 1438
πἀντες τοῖς
λόγοις
ἀναπτεροῦνται, ib. 1447 ὑπὸ λόγων
ἐπαίρεται ; Isocr. 5, 40
τὰς πόλεις
ὡμαλισμένας ὑπὸ τῶν συμφορῶν, 6, 65 ὡμαλισμένοι
ταῖς συμφοραῖς.
Ἔτος
—Intr.
p. xlii.
ὡμολογεῖτο ἐκ πάντων
—the other places in
Thuc. in which ἐκ = ὑπὸ are I. 20,
2; III. 69,
1; V. 104
; VI. 36,
2. The use is not found in Aristoph., and there are but very faint
and doubtful traces of it in the orators. This use is Ionic, but
occurs now and then in Attic (though Shil. denies the use
altogether). ὁμολογοῦμαι often has παρὰ instead of
ὑπὸ (Andoc. 1, 140; Lysias,
30, 12; Isaeus, 1, 38 and 42; 2, 16 and 40; 4. 15; 11, 10; Demosth. 34,
5; Dinarch.
1, 53 and 90; 3, 8), in Demosth.
29,
20
ὁμολογεῖσθαι
has πρός; in Isaeus
5, 17 we have ἃ ὡμολογήθη ἡμῖν: so
Plat
Phaedo, p. 106 C.
προέκαμνε
—viz.
before the plague established itself. Contrast the opt. and imperf.
in c.
51,
1, where Thuc. uses the indef. form because he speaks of a long
period of time, whereas here he refers to a definite moment,
viz. just before the plague broke out.
ἀπεκρίθη
—‘determined in this,’ i.e. ‘the symptoms eventually assumed the
character of the disease.’ All who were ailing before were attacked.
Τοὺς δ’ ἄλλους
—when once an epidemic has
esta- blished itself, it shows itself ‘suddenly and without
ostensible cause’ (Collier). These words must not be so pressed as
to admit of no exceptions whatever; exceptions are mentioned in c.
51,
1.
πρῶτον μὲν
—first
stage; intense heat in head, inflammation in eyes, bleeding from
throat and tongue, fetid breath, and, after these symptoms,
sneezing
and hoarseness.
ἄτοπον
—cf. c.
51,
1, ‘unnatural.’
ἠφίει
—both
ἀφίει and ἠφίει are
Attic.
φάρυγξ
—see not.
crit.: ancient grammarians were not agreed on the
orthography. Herodian says
φάρυξ, Hesych. φάρυγξ
.
Ἐξ αὐτῶν
—after the symptoms just
described. See c.
4,
2.
πταρμὸς
—due
to inflammation of the mucous membrane.
καὶ ἐν οὐ πολλῷ
—second stage: the disease
attacks the chest, the consequence of the passage of the morbid
action along the membrane that lines the respiratory organ being
violent coughing. For ἐν οὐ
πολλῷ contrast c.
41,
3.
πόνος
—‘the
disorder.’
ὁπότε
—third
stage: the disease, on reaching the stomach, caused vomiting and
great distress, and, in most cases, ineffectual retching; then
the
skin turned livid, and broke out in vesicles which degenerated
into
ulcers. Then came the crisis.
καρδίαν
—‘stomach.’
στηρίξειεν
—
intrans., a medical use.
ἀποκαθάρσεις
—‘vomits
of bile.’
ὅσαι
—evidently referring to different
terms used to denote the various colours that bile has in different
diseases, or stages of a disease;
e.g. in cholera, the bile is first dark brown, then light
green. Probably, as Grote says, Thuc. was acquainted with medical
terms.
ὑπὸ ἰατρῶν ὠνομασμέναι
—though the subject is
non-personal, yet, if it be a nom, or fem. noun, it is not uncommon
to find the agent with the perf. pass. expressed by ὑπό, instead of by the regular dat.:
see on c.
29,
3.
ταλαιπωρίας
—‘distress’
(tenesmus): a medical term.
Λύγξ
—rendered ‘retching,’ but Collier
says it should be ‘hiccough,’ because the hiccough is an important
symptom of deadly maladies, especially of those which affect the
membrane of parts within the chest. But (1) this leaves κενὴ unexplained, (2) the disease
described is now unknown.
ἐνδιδοῦσα
— ‘producing,’ the same use of ἐν as in ἐμποιῶ,
ἐντίθημι. μετὰ
ταῦτα
—after the previous symptoms (see third stage).
λωφήσαντα
—with μετὰ
ταῦτα. Cf. c.
2,
1. λωφᾶ·|
παύεται Hesych., cf. Plat.
Phaedrus, 251 C λωφᾷ τῆς ὀδύνης
(Collier takes this with σπασμόν,
as do some edd., but this would require
λωφῶντα to match ἐνδιδοῦσα
).
Τὸ μὲν ἔξωθεν
—adverbial, ἔξωθεν being for ἔξω. Cf. c.
13,
7.
ἁπτομένῳ
—with θερμὸν
ἦν, ‘to the touch.’
σῶμα
—for absence of art. cf. 8 below.
χλωρόν
—‘pale.’
φλύκταιναι
—transparent
vesicles, little blains which degenerate into sores.
τὰ δὲ ἐντὸς
—the
ἀκμὴ of the disease is now reached. It came in the third
stage, and was marked by internal fever, intolerable
thirst, and sleeplessness: yet the body was scarcely weakened by its
suffering.
μήτε
— answered by ἥδιστά τε. τὰς
ἐπιβολὰς
—for
the order, cf.
18, 1.
μηδ’
—not connected with μήτε, but only joins ἐπιβολὰς to ἄλλο
τι
ἢ and with it=nec
nisi; cf. c.
16,
2.
γυμνοὶ
—the nom. is justified by τὰ ἐντός, part of themselves, With
γυμνοὶ supply ὄντες.
Cf. c.
45,
1 ὁρῶ
μέγαν τὸν ἀγῶνα. So with
τυγχἀνω c.
87,
5,
φαίνεσθαι c.
39,
4. In the two cases in which Thuc. uses
διατελῶ with adj., he omits ὤν
(I. 34
; VI. 89
);
contrast VII. 38
παρασκευαζόμενοι διετέλεσαν. ἥδιστα
ἂν
—
i.e.
ἥδιστ’ ἂν ἔρριπτον, lit.
‘so as to have thrown themselves (had they been allowed).’ The
infin. with ἂν is not common with ὤστε. M. T. 211,
592.
καὶ πολλοὶ
— ‘and in fact.’ Cf. c.
2,
4.
ἔδρασαν
—cf. c.
11,
8. Here = σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἔρριψαν. τῇ
δίψῃ ἀπαύστῳ
—the
adj., being pred., is emphatic, as always; ‘which was unceasing.’
(There are not many examples quite like this in Thuc.: I. 49
ἑνέπρησαν τὰς σκηνὰς ἐρήμους, c.
13,
5 τὰ
χρήματα οὐκ ὀλίγα, IV. 122
τῇ ἰσχύι ἀνωφελεῖ πιστεύοντες, and VII. 70,
6).
τὸ πλέον καὶ ἔλασσον
—the art. omitted with ἔλασσον, though the two things are
mutually exclusive, as in I. 10
τὰς μεγίστας καὶ ἐλαχίστας. ἡ
ἀπορία
τοῦ μὴ
—the
infin. after a noun, as in c.
60,
7 αἰτίαν
τοῦ ἀδικεῖν. The μὴ
is added because the whole result is neg., as often. Plat. Apol. p. 38 D ἀπορίᾳ
...
τοῦ μὴ ἐθέλειν, ‘the neg. being added as after other
neg. or prohibitive words’ (Shil.). Andoc.
2,
12
κίνδυνος περὶ τοῦ μηδὲ
αὐτοὺς σωθῆναι, ‘a risk lest not even they should be
saved.’ See also c.
62,
3; III. 75,
4 ἡ τοῦ μὴ ξυμπλεῖν
ἀπιστία.
)Επέκειτο
—instabat;
cf. c.
59,
1.
ὅσονπερ καὶ
— like ὥσπερ
καί, the καὶ merely
making the two things parallel.
ἀκμάζοι
—iterative, in a rel. clause. Cf. VII. 70,
5 ὅσον
χρόνον προσφέροιτο ναῦς. M. T.
521.
ὥστε
—the result is in the partic. ἔτι ἔχοντες, not in διεφθείροντο: this inversion of partic.
and verb is very common.
οἱ πλεῖστοι
—belongs only to διεφθείροντο, a new subject οἱ
πολλοὶ (most of the minority who did not die on the
7th or 9th day) being inserted in the next clause.
καὶ ἑβδομαῖοι
—the
main emphasis is on this, the second member, as constantly in
Greek.
ὑπὸ τοῦ καύματος
—c.
47,
4.
τι δυνάμεως
—cf. I.
5, 1
τι καὶ
δόξης , III.
44,
2 ἐχοντάς τι ξυγγνώμης.
διαφύγοιεν
—‘pulled
through.’
ἐπικατιόντος
—fourth
stage, only reached by comparatively few, marked by ulceration
of
the bowels, after the internal fever had abated; then followed
violent dysentery, leaving the patient so weak that he generally
died.
ἀπεφθείροντο
—poetical word. See not. crit.
Ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ π. ἱδρυθὲν
—Kr.
thinks this an adscript, and is followed by F. Muller.
τῶν γε
—effects
seen in
the convalescents ‘a seizure of the extremities remained as
a mark (of the disease)’.
ἀντίληψις
—for
ἐπίσκηψις. Elsewhere ἀ.
= an objection to an argument, as Plat. Phaedo
p. 87 A. [
αὐτοῦ
]—if the conjecture αὐτὸ = τὸ
περιγενέσθαι, it clearly involves a contradiction, since
Thuc. is giving the signs of the disease before the recovery, but it
might stand in the sense of τὸ κακόν. ἐπεσήμαινε
—absolute,
cf. c.
8,
3, 43, 3. Cf. Eur. Hec. 1215.
Ἐς αἰδοῖα
—art.
omitted, as often with parts of the body.
παραυτίκα ἀναστάντας
—‘immediately
on their recovery.’ The loss of memory was temporary.
ἠγνόησαν
—aor., giving the result of the
imperf.
ἐλάμβανε .
Παραλιπόντι
—as
ἁπτομένῳ
49, 5, ὑπερβάντι
96, 1. ἀτοπίας
—‘omitting
many peculiarities,’ πολλὰ ἀτοπίας
being like μέγα ἰσχίος
97, 4, and the common expressions εἰς
τοσοῦτο, εἰς τοῦτο with gen., as Demosth.
21, 62
εἰς τοσοῦτ’ ἀναιδείας
ἀφίκετο. Cf. c.
17,
4.
διαφερόντως
—lit. differently to one as
compared with another, i.e. peculiarities
‘which marked individual cases.’
πρὸς=‘compared with,’ as in 62,
3.
ἐπὶ πᾶν
—cf. ἐπὶ
μέγα
76, 4, ἐπὶ
πλεῖστον
34, 8,
35, 3; translate with τὴν ἰδέαν,
‘its general nature.’
επὶ is local.
ἰσέαν
— contrast the meaning in c.
19,
1.
παρελύπει—παρα‐
denotes simultaneous
action or intrusion on something more important. Cf.
Plat. Phaedo 65 C λογἰζεται
κάλλιστα ὅταν
αὐτὴν τούτων μηδὲν παραλυπῇ. Cf. παρενοχλεῖν. κατ’ ἐκεῖνον
—i. e. throughout the time that the plague
lasted.
γἐνοιτο
—contrast the mood in 49, 1: here the general form is required by the
sense. Cf. 49, 6.
Ἀμελείᾳ
—causal,
some might have been saved had they been treated.
θεραπευόμενοι
—‘in
spite of’ etc.
ἕν τε οὐδὲ ἓν
—a very strong neg., for which cf. Demosth. 23, 70
ἓν
οὐδ’
ὁτιοῦν τούτων, and for
οὐδὲν resolved, Andoc. 1, 29
οὔτε μεῖζον οὔτ’ ἔλαττον οὐδὲ ἕν. ὡς
εἰπεῖν
—qualifies the
universal statement Shil. remarks that Thuc. never writes ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ὅ τι χρῆν
προσφέροντας
—i.e.
ὅ τι χρῆν
προσφέρειν
ὥστε
ὠφελείν. The partic. really belongs to χρῆν. This irregularity is found also
with δεῖ. Kr. Gr.
Gr. 56, 10, 5.
προσφέροντας
—a medical term, to
interfere with the course of a malady, etc., by any means. Cf. Plat. Phaedo 63 D δεῖν
οὐδὲν τοιοῦτον προσφέρειν τῷ φαρμάκῳ. τοῦτο
—c.
53,
3 ὅ τι
ἤδη ἡδὺ ... τοῦτο κ.τ.λ., 64, 6.
This ‘epanaleptic’ οὗτος is
commonest after relative clauses, as Isaeus, 1, 28 Κλεώνυμος ὃς
ἦν ἡμῖν
οἰκειότατος ... οὗτος κ.τ.λ., but at any rate in
colloquial Attic it was freely used even when no rel. preceded.
Ἰσχύος πέρι
—cf. c.
62,
1, ‘as regards physical strength or weakness,’
i.e. ‘whether strong or weak.’
ξυνῄρει
—subject
αὐτό = τὸ νόσημα .
Δεινότατον
—pred. to (a
) ἀθυμία, (b
) ὄτι .. ἔθνη?σκον. πολλῷ
μᾶλλον
—sc. ἢ διεφθείροντο ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, because
the worst possible thing to do in illness is to lose hope: they
abandoned themselves to despair and really threw their lives away,
instead of resisting.
ἀφ’ ἑτέρου θ.
— = ἀπὸ τοῦ
ἕτερον θεραπεῦσαι.
ἀναπιμπλάμενοι
—the
technical word for taking infection. Cf. Plat.
Phaedo, p. 67 A μὴ ἀναπιμπλώμεθα
τῆς
τούτου φύσεως. So ἀναπλἑως,
infected, ib. p. 83 D.
τοῦτο
— i.e. the
contagion, because (a) the fear of catching
the disease caused neglect of the sick, (b)
while those who attended the sick caught it.
Μὴ θέλοιεν
—according to the MSS., which
are quite worthless in such a case, the orators said μὴ θέλειν and μὴ
ἐθέλειν indiscriminately Shil. prints
)θέλοιεν here; so some other edd. after μὴ. It is probable that ἐθέλω is, after all, the invariable
prose form. (See Rutherford, New
Phryn. p. 416, Meisterhans, p. 142.)
ἀπώλλυντο ...
ἐκενώθη?σαν
—the complexive aor.
again gives the result of the verb in imperf. Cf. c.
50,
1.
τοῦ θεραπεύσοντος
—cf. Aesch. Prom. V. 27
ὁ λωφήσων γὰρ οὐ
πέφυκέ πω. The art. refers to no person in particular.
Kr. Gr. Gr. 50, 4, 3. The fut. partic. with
art. is not common. M. T. 826.
ἀρετῆς
— =
φιλανθρωπίας. Cf.
c. 40,
4.
αἰσχύνῃ
—cf. c.
43,
1.
ὀλοφύρσεις
—the
complorationes over those who died: friends had to go because
relatives actually wearied even of performing the proper offices for
the dead. The
καὶ before ὀλοφύρσεις
shows that having already neglected to attend
to their sick, they
also took no notice of them when they died.
τῶν ἀπογιγνομένων
—cf. c.
34,
2. The imperf. is used of the constant
deaths, as ἀπώλλυντο etc. above.
ἐξέκαμνον
—‘wearied of,’ so ἀποκάμν ειν occasionally.
ὑπὸ . . νικώμενοι
—c.
47,
4.
Ἐπὶ πλέον
—c.
35,
3. Thuc. uses this expression about a dozen times in this sense (μᾶλλον).
πονούμενον
—cf. c.
49,
3.
ἐν τῷ θαρσαλέῳ εἶναι
—cf. c.
60
ἐν ἴσῳ (
εἶναι ), III.
22,
6 ἐν ἀπόρῳ εἶναι, and many others.
κούφης
—‘vain,’ because ἂν διαφθαρῆναι implies ‘if they fell
ill with any other disease.’ They fancied that they could only die
of old age.
ὑπ’ ἄλλου .. διαφθαρῆναι
—see on c.
47,
4.
Ἐπίεσε .. ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ
—the
in version makes both emphatic.
ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀ
—for the art. not repeated before the
prep., cf. c.
18,
3, 38, 1. (a) The noun
or adj. must be connected with a verb which takes the construction
used with it (κομίζομαι ἐκ
τῶν ἀ.) to admit of this inversion of the order, (b) if the words which are inverted precede (see on c.
7,
2), the object is to produce an antithesis; but if, as more
commonly, they follow the noun or adj., it is merely for the sake of
convenience.
οὐχ ἧσσον
— =
μᾶλλον.
Καλύβαις
—Aristoph. (see c.
17,
1) says ἐν ταῖς πιθάκναισι καὶ γυπαρίοις καὶ
πυργιδίοις. ὥρᾳ ἔτους
—Suidas
gives ὥρα ἔτους· τὸ ἔαρ καὶ τὸ θέρος,
and rightly takes ὥρα to denote the
best time, as we use ‘the season.’
οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ
—it may be judged from tragedy how important the Greeks thought
it
to make a graceful exit from the world.
ἀλλὰ καὶ
—expresses οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ in a positive form. [
ἀποθνῄσκοντες
] —a gloss on ἡμιθνῆτες. (It is not possible to take
this as imperf. partic., like
ἀπογιγνομένων in 51, 5, since not νεκροὶ ἀποθνῄσκοντες, but νεκροὶ ἀποθνῃσκόντων would be
necessary; for νεκρὸς ἀπέθανεν
could not be right)
καλινδούμενοι—καλινδοῦμαι is
figurative in meaning) (κυλίνδομαι
is literal.
Ἐναποθνῃσκόντων
—gen.
abs. ‘men dying there.’
ἔχοντες
— =
εἰδότες. ὅ τι
—cf. Eur. Or. 418
δουλεύομεν θεοῖς, ὄ τι ποτ’ εἰσὶν οἱ θεοἰ. ἱερῶν καὶ ὁσίων
—cf. Isocr. 7, 66
τὴν
δημοκρατίαν κος
μήσασαν τὴν πόλιν καὶ τοῖς ἱεροῖς καὶ τοῖς ὀσίοις, and 53, 4 θεῶν
φόβος ἢ
ἀνθρώπων
νόμος .
Θήκας
—for
ταφάς, ‘modes of burial.’ This meaning is sufficiently
proved by Sta., who quotes Plat. Rep. 427 B.
ἐπιτηδείων
—neut., whatever was required
for the burning and burial.
ἐπὶ πυρὰς
—governed both by ἐπιθέντες and
ἐπιβαλόντες. For ἐπὶ
πυρὰς ... ἑπιθέντες . . ὑφῆπτον, see c.
13,
2.
ὃν φέροιεν
—M. T.
522.
Πρῶτον ἦρξε
—cf. c.
36,
1.
καὶ
—besides those instances of ἀνομία just mentioned.
ἐπὶ πλέον
—cf. c.
51,
1, ‘to a greater extent’ (than ever before), since the αἰσχύνη which followed the breach of
the ἄγραφοι νόμοι (c.
37,
3) was no longer felt.
ἀνομίας
—governed by ἧρξε. ἀπεκρύπτετο μὴ
—c.
49,
5.
καθ’ ἡδονὴν
—as 37,
2, but with a bad sense.
ἀγχίστροφον
—Ionic
word, not found elsewhere in Attic prose.
μεταβολὴν
—43, 5.
ὁρῶντες
—plur., though τις precedes, as after ἕκαστος, ἕτερος, πᾶς, οὐδείς. τῶν
τ’
—the τε is answered by καὶ before
οὐδέν, and each pair is introduced by a single τῶν, since εὐδαιμόνων
. θνῃσκόντων apply to one set of persons, κεκτημένων . . ἐχόντων to another set.
Ἐπαυρέσεις
—Ionic for ἀπολαύσεις, which Thuc. also uses, c. 38,
42. It was revived by late writers from Aristotle onwards:
Andocides uses it once.
πρὸς τὸ τερπνὸν
—cf. c.
65,
8 πρὸς
ἡδονήν τι λέγειν. ἐπαύρεσις is the advantage, gain, or
good to be got out of any act: generally it is neither immediately
realised, nor does it take the form of mere sensual enjoyment; but
now honourable ambition and forethought no longer prompted action.
Τὸ μὲν προταλαιπωρεῖν
—the art. and inf.
depend, as accus of respect, on πρόθυμος
ἦν. The purpose of the art, is to contrast the two
clauses introduced by μὲν
... δέ, since below ὅ τι
δὲ
ἤδη
ἡδὺ = τὸ δὲ ἤδη ἡδύ.
Cf. c.
87,
5, VI. 17
τὸ μὲν ἐς τὴν γῆν ἐσβάλλειν, ικανοί εἰσι, τῷ δὲ
ναυτικῷ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο βλάπτειν. τῷ δόξαντι
καλῷ
—‘for the
sake of what seemed honourable’; cf. VIII. 63
οὐκέτι ἄλλοις ἢ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ταλαιπωροῦντας.
τῷ
δόξαντι
καλῷ differs from τῷ καλῷ
in that the former denotes that no man had the will to strive after
that which he himself conceived to be good;
much less would he trouble himself about Good as a principle One
reflected, τοῦτό μοι δοκεῖ
καλὸν
εἶναι, ἀλλὰ πρὶν ἐπ’ αὐτὸ ἐλθεῖν διαφθαρησομαι. (There
is probably no reference here to good as universally admitted, as
some have supposed: δόξαν applies
to individual cases.)
νομίζων
—the partic. again appended
somewhat freely to the preceding clause. Cf. 1 above and 4 below.
Here not οὐδεὶς but ἕκαστος must be supplied: somewhat
similar is VI. 27
τοὺς δράσαντας ᾔδει οὐδείς, ἀλλὰ . .
ἐζητοῦντο
καὶ
προσέτι
ἐψηφίσαντο (sc. οἱ
Ἀθηναῖοι ); IV.
59
οὐδεὶς ...
ἢν (sc. τις) οἴηταί
τι πλέον σχήσειν, ἀποτρέπεται,
VI.
84
ὑπολάβῃ μηδεὶς ὡς οὐδὲν προσῆκον ὑμῶν κη?δόμεθα,
γνοὺς ὅτι κ.τ.λ. ἤδη τε ἡδὺ καὶ— τε ... καὶ
= sive .. sive, the first clause answering to σώματα, the second to χρήματα in 2 above.
πανταχόθεν τὸ ἐς αὐτὸ
κερδαλέον
— = (ὅ τι)
πανταχόθεν ἐς
τὸ ἤδη ἡδὺ κερδαλἐον ἦν, ‘or contributed to the
pleasure of the moment, regardless of the source from which it was
obtained,’ i.e. men did not care how
disgraceful were the means by which they strove to gratify their
immediate desires. The sanctity of oaths and contracts was no longer
respected; for the sake of gain fraud and crime became καλὸν
καὶ χρήσιμον, and what was gained was immediately
squandered.
πανταχόθεν
—cf.
Intr. p. xl.: all means, good or bad, were alike to them.
τοῦτο
—cf. c.
51,
2.
καλὸν
—1st Cor.
15, 32 φάγωμεν
καὶ πίωμεν· αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνήσκομεν. (Thuc. does not
say they really thought these base things
καλόν: it was not τὸ δόξαν καλὸν
that changed, but τὸ καθεστηκὸς καλόν.
The public standard of morality is a very different thing from what
each man in his heart thinks moral.)
Τὸ μὲν
—‘on the one hand,’ answered by δέ, instead of τὸ
δέ. κρίνοντες
—anacoluthon,
as though the preceding clause had been pass. = ὑπ’
οὐδενὸς νόμου ἀπείργοντο. Such a slight irregularity
is not uncommon in Thuc. and tragedy, as
Eur. Hec. 971
αἰδώς
μ’ ἔχει ... τυγχάνουσα. Cf. III. 36
ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς . ἐπικαλοῦντες. (Shil.
quotes IV. 108,
as a ‘still bolder anacoluthon.’ But the cases are almost certainly
wrong there. As εἰωθότες
κ.τ.λ. is clearly general, prob. the gen. abs. should
be read.)
ἐν ὁμοίῳ
—cf. c.
49,
5, 61
ἐν ἴσῳ
δικαιοῦν , 60
ἐν ἴσῳ (
ἐστί).
καὶ μὴ
—sc.
σέβειν. ἐλπίζων
—cf.
c.
11,
6; had a plur. been nearer and οὐδεὶς
not so near, Thuc. would have written
ἐλπίζοντες, as VII.
28,
3.
μέχρι τοῦ
—so v. 73,
4.
βιοὺς ἂν
—the ἂν
belongs also to ἀντιδοῦναι, = βιῶναι ἂν καὶ ἀντιδοῦναι.
τιμωρίαν
—with τῶν ὰμαρτημάτων. The art. and
ἀντιδοῦναι shows that they sinned well knowing that
retribution awaited them if they lived. With the general
description, cf. St. Matthew, XXIV. 12, where Christ speaks of the
destruction of Jerusalem, διὰ τὸ πληθυνθῆναι
τὴν ἀνομίαν ψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγαπὴ τῶν πολλῶν. πολὺ
δὲ
—sc νομίζοντες, and for the interchange of
words of saying and thinking which have to be supplied from the
context, cf. c. 13.
κατεψηφισμένην
—sc. τιμωρίαν, i.e.
νόσον. ἣν ... εἶναι
—cf.
c.
13,
5, 24, 2, 102, 5.
εἰκὸς
—c. 10, 1.
Τοιούτῳ μὲν
—the description is now
concluded, the following particulars heing added as an afterthought
(
a) to illustrate the superstition rife at the time, (b) to indicate the
locale of the plague.
περιπεσόντες
—cf. c.
59,
2, and the phrase, συμφορᾷ περιπεσεῖν,
constantly occurring in the orators.
Ἐν
—‘during,’ though
κακὸν is not temporal. Cf. c.
63,
1.
οἷα εἰκός
—cf. c.
5,
4, and ὡς
εἰκός
VIII. 2,
3.
ἔπους
—‘verse,’ 41,
4.
οἱ πρεσβύτεροι
—limiting apposition. Cf. 4, 2, 11, 1,
16, 1,
21, 3.
ᾄδεσθαι
—c.
8,
2, 21, 3.
ἥξει
—common in prophecies,
Eur. Sup. 1222
πικροὶ
γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἥξετ’ ἐκτεθραμμένοι | σκύμνοι
λεόντων. St. Matt. XXIV. 14 τότε
ἥξει τὸ τέλος. πόλεμος
καὶ λοιμὸς
—there
is intentional παρομοίωσις here,
as often in oracles. The change of
λιμὸς to λοιμὸς
would be suggested by Il. 1, 61 εἰ δὴ
ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς, and Hesiod, W. and D. 242 μέγ’
ἐπήγαγε πῆμα
Κρονίων | λιμὸν ὁμοῦ καὶ
λοιμόν .
Ὠνομάσθαι
—‘that
famine, and not pestilence had been the
original word.’ (This translation is imperfect because it introduces
a comparatively modern association.)
ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιῶν
—might
have been dat.
ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος
—cf. ἐπὶ τῷ παρόντι c.
36,
4. The gen. is more distinctly temporal = ‘at the moment.’
πρὸς ἃ ἔπασχον
—cf.
VI. 34
τῶν ἀνθρώπων πρὸς τὰ λεγόμενα καὶ αἱ γνῶμαι
ἵστανται. μνήμην
ἐποιοῦντο
—
act. of μνήμη ἐγένετο in 4 below,
and = ἀνεμνήσθησαν in 2.
δέ γε
—these
particles always cap a previous statement, whether made by the
speaker himself or an opponent. They are sometimes separated.
καταλάβῃ
—c.
18,
2.
Ὅτε
—see c.
21,
1.
τὸν θεόν
—as Apollo was both healer and
destroyer, they thought that the god was helping the enemy by
sending the plague. Cf. the opening of Il. 1,
and O. T. first chorus.
Περὶ μὲν οὖν
—Thuc. leaves this doubtful,
without expressing his own opinions: then he goes on with the facts, δὲ being equivalent to δ’ οὖν. ‘As concerns .., they thought
that what was happening corresponded to it.’
ὅ τι ἄ. καὶ εἰπεῖν
— = ὅ τι
καὶ ἀ. εἰπεῖν. ταῦτα
μὲν —ἐστι is regularly omitted in this
phrase, as in sed haec hactenus. Cf. IV. 41,
4; VII. 87,
6.
Ἔτι δ’
—cf. c.
13,
init.
τῇ Π.
—the dat. depends on ἐπίπλουν.
ἑτοῖμα
—cf. c.
3,
4.
Ἐπὶ τῶν
—see c.
80,
2
ἱππαγωγοῖς
—this is the first occasion on
which the Athenians used transports. (The Persians used them, Herod.
VI. 48.) They were triremes (IV. 42;
VI.
43
); in 424 they
were sufficiently novel to provide Aristoph. with a joke, Eq. 599. It was very important to have
cavalry in the plundering expeditions, in order to be able to
penetrate as far inland as possible.
Χῖοι καὶ Λ.
— cf. c.
9,
4.
ναυσίν
—the
dat. of accompaniment, only used in naval and military phrases.
Ὅτε
—the imperf., as usual, after ὅτε, denoting that the act described in
the principal clause occurs at the same time as that described in
the temporal clause. Cf. on c.
21,
1, and c.
99,
6.
τῆς Ἀττικῆς
—for the order, cf. c.
18,
1, and contrast 4 below, where the emphasis is on Ἐπίδαυρον, whereas here the point is
that the Peloponnesians were still in Attica, cf. 6 below.
Ἐπίδαυρον
—the most important place yet
attacked by the Athenians; it would have been valuable to them, as
it lay on the road to Argos, which was then neutral (c.
9,
2) and might possibly join them if they obtained possession of so
considerable a state: and other towns, as Troezen and Hermione might
have fallen into their hands.
ἔτεμον
—it is not clear why Pericles
ravaged the country before attacking Epidaurus: probably he had
planned a stratagem to seize the place with a small force while the
main body was scattered about and was keeping the troops that
guarded the town (only a third of the whole force of Epidaurus, c.
47,
2) occupied.
ἐς ἐλπίδα ἦλθον
—the phrases ἐλπίς ἐστι, ἐν ἐλπίδι εἶναι, ἐλπίδα
ἔχειν have the simple infin. aor. in most cases, as c. 80, 1; but in c.
85,
4 ἐλπίδος
ούσης has the fut. infin., and in
102, 3 ἐλπὶς has ἂν
παθεῖν; while in I. 144,
1 we have ἐλπίδα τοῦ περιέσεσθαι.
Cf. on c.
13,
9.
οὐ μἐντοι
—this failure is probably due
to a rally of the inhabitants similar to that of the Plataeans, c. 3.
προεχώρησε
—impersonal;
cf. I. 109
ὼς αὐτῷ οὐ προυχώρει ; III. 18
ἐπειδὴ
οὐ προυχώρει ᾗ προσεδέχοντο; al.
Ἐκ τῆς Ἐ.
—the
attack on Epidaurus was the greatest enterprise of Athens before
427.
Ἁλιάδα
—the
country round Halice, an unimportant town on the south-east
coast of
Argolis.
Ἑρμιονίδα
—Hermione
had a territory of some extent on the coast of the Gulf of
Hermione.
Πρασιάς
—on north-east coast of Laconia.
It suffered severely from the war, and is a proof how effective the
method of Pericles was. Intr. p. lxx. Aristoph. Pax, 242 ἰὼ Πρασιαὶ
τρισάθλιαι καὶ πεντάκις. οὐκέτι
—nothing
is said of the route taken by the Peloponnesians after they left
Laurium.
κατέλαβον
—always takes
pres. or perf. part.: IV. 129,
1 (pres.), I.
59,
1 (perf.).
Ὡς ... ἐτέτμητο
—the plup. has nothing to do
with ἠλλοίωντο, (
i.e. the meaning is not that the land had been ravaged before
the change came over their feelings), but describes the state of the
country as it lay ruined before their eyes. The other places in
which ὡς has the plup. (III. 23,
1, 26, 4, 27, 1, 69, 2) are similar. Cf. on c.
3,
1.
ὁ πόλεμος
—referring to the other miseries besides the ruin of the trees,
crops and buildings, such as the difficulty of living and the
burdens of service.
ἠλλοίωντο
—plup.,
because the change had come over them before Hagnon's
expedition,
during Pericles' absence. Intr. p. lxxv.
Ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον
—cf. the following, ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ., c.
18,
5, 21, 3, 65, 3; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ., III. 9
; ἐν
ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ., c.
89,
1. This idiom is not found in the orators, but occurs in tragedy.
περιπεπτωκότες
—see c.
54,
1.
πρὸς τοὺς Λ.
—with
ξυγχωρεῖν. πρέσβεις
—Sta.
reads
πρεσβείας with MT only. Dion. Hal. thinks that Thuc.
ought to have given a detailed account of these transactions. The
reason he does not do so is that nothing came of them.
πανταχόθεν
—not
local, but = ‘utterly.’
ἄποροι καθεστῶτες
—
i.e.
εἰς ἀπορίαν κ. c.
81,
8; εἰς
τοσαύτην ἀπορίαν ἐλθεῖν
Isocr.
8,
47 ; εἰς τοῦτο καταστῆσαι
ἀπορίας
Demosth.
22, 132; εἰς ἄπορον πεσεῖν
Aristoph. Clouds 702.
Ὁρῶν ... ποιήσας
—see c.
4,
4.
πρὸς τὰ π.
—c.
22,
1, 64, 6 πρὸς πὰς
ξυμφοράς , 88, 3 π. τὴν παροῦσαν
ὄψιν. ἤλπιζε—of bad events, as in
I. 1,
1.
ξύλλογον
—c.
22,
1. Pericles still held his extraordinary power. Intr. p. lxvi., and
it was perhaps by virtue of this that he was able to have a special
meeting summoned. Cf. c.
13,
1.
ἔτι δ’
—i.e. he
had not yet been suspended from office and brought to trial (
ἀποχειροτονηθείς). Intr. pp. lxxv.
fol. will make this clear.
ἐστρατήγει
—‘held office,’ implying that
he was still
αὐτοκράτωρ. He was just completing another year of
office, and was Strategus elect for the official year soon to begin.
Cf. c.
55,
2.
τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γ.
—cf. VII. 68
τῆς γ. τὸ
θυμούμενον. This neuter partic. as noun abstract
presents the idea as an action going on, not as an abstract notion
separate from all associations of time and
circumstance. Cf. c.
87,
3. It is frequent in Euripides.
πρὸς ... καταστῆσαι
—the ordinary
construction is ἐς (see 2 above),
but τρέπεσθαι has ἐπί, πρός, ἐς, and several verbs ἐπὶ or ἐς
in Thuc. Cf. c.
65,
9.
καταστῆσαι
—sc. τὴν
γνώμην. ἔλεξε
—the
Schol. labels the speech δημηγορία
Περικλέους
πρὸς Ἀθηναίους. The speech was also known in antiquity
as ἡ οἰκεία Περικλέους
δημηγορία .
Καὶ . καὶ
—parataxis; cf. c.
46,
1.
προσδεχο‐ μένῳ ...
γεγένηται
—cf. c.
3,
2. M. T. 900.
τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς
— ‘this outburst of wrath,’ as τὰ τῆς τύχης; see on c.
44,
2.
ξυνήγαγον
—the
aor. of momentary action, as continually in tragedy.
ὄπως
—the subjun. is certainly to be
preferred to the fut. indic. here, as this is a pure final clause. M.
T. 364 (ὅπως is Thuc.'s
favourite final particle, but is rare in other prose authors except
Xen.).
εἴ τι
—he
does not doubt it, but softens the expression.
Πλείω
—with
ὠφελεῖν. This sentence contains a triple antithesis.
ὀρθουμένην ..
σφαλλομένην
—the
state is personified.
καθ’ ἕκαστον
—because
it is when prosperity has engendered selfishness and oblivion of
corporate life that states go to ruin.
Καλῶς φερόμενος
—cf. v. 15,
2, 16, 1; φ.
of the course that affairs take. This γνώμη is the premiss of the following
enthymeme (see c.
11,
7) ‘It is well for the citizens that the state should prosper even
if they have to sacrifice themselves: for the citizens must fall
with the state, and when the state prospers, the citizens easily
overcome their troubles. Therefore the citizens must sacrifice
themselves for the state.’ Cf. 4 below.
τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν
—cf. c.
11,
3.
διαφθειρομένης
—there is παρονομασία between this and
φερόμενος, also between
κακοτυχῶν and εὐτυχούσῃ. πολλῷ μᾶλλον
—sc. ἢ ἐν κακοτυχούσῃ.
Ὁπότε
—‘since,’ so that the verb to be
supplied is ἐστί. Andoc 1, 7 and
89.
εἶς ἕκαστος
—cf.
VI. 41
εἶς τε ἕκαστος καὶ ἡ
ξύμπασα πόλις; VIII.
89
ἠγωνίζετο εἶς ἔκαστος. μὴ
—the
sentence does not end regularly, the construction being carried on
to suit the parenthesis ὃ νῦν ὑ.
δρᾶτε. We expect καὶ μὴ
ἀφίεσθαι. Cf. Plat. Phaedrus, 272 D παντάπασι γάρ, ὃ καὶ κατ’ ἀρχὰς εἴπομεν τοῦδε τοῦ
λόγου, ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀληθείας μετέχειν δέοι τὸν μέλλοντα ῥητορικὸν
ἔσεσθαι. ταῖς
κατ’
οἶκον κ.τ.λ.—epexegesis of δρᾶτε. Cf. VI. 11
ὅπερ ... πεπόνθατε· διὰ τὸ περιγεγενῆσθαι ...
Σικελίας
ἐφίεσθε. Shil notes that Latin idiom expresses the
epexegesis of facio by
ut.
κατ’ οἶκον
— cf. Aristoph. Lys. 261
ἃς ἐβόσκομεν κατ’ οἶκον, ‘at home.’
This phrase differs from κατὰ
τὴν
οἰκίαν = ‘about the house,’ Aristoph. Thesm.
402, and has a wider sense than κατ’
οἰκίαν, ‘in private,’ Aristoph. Vesp.
1180 .
τοῦ κοινοῦ
—objective gen. to σωτηρίας, but put first for the sake of
the emphatic antithesis to κατ’ οἶκον. ὑμᾶς
—he
dexterously throws the charge back on them.
ξυνέγνωτε
—the prep. here has an
adverbial force. Cf. c.
64,
1.
δῑ αἰτίας ἔχειν
—cf. c.
59,
2, and 11, 3 This idiom is rare in other Attic
prose writers (not found in orators).
Καίτοι
—there is no
prothesis to this speech (see on c.
36,
4), the reason being that in c.
59.
3, and 65, 1 Thuc. explains the object which
Pericles had in the Πίστις, and so
had no need to insert it here.
ἐμοὶ
—the analysis makes the πίστις begin here. But the Schol. who
notes on these words παραγραφικὸν
ἐν δεινότητι must have taken this to be part of the προοίμιον and thought that the πίστις began with c.
61.
(I begin the πίστις here with Fr.
Muller, against the Schol., Altinger and Leitschel, because the
object of Pericles in the πίστις
certainly was τῆς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ὀργῆς
παραλύειν
τοὺς
Ἀθηναίους, 65, 1. Τὸ
παραγραφικὸν comes in the
προοίμιον, but Thuc. may have meant the last part of 4 to
represent this.)
τοιούτῳ
—
here follows another enthymeme: ‘You are unjustly angry with
Pericles: for he is able, patriotic, honest and can tell you
what is
best for you; without all these qualities, a statesman is of
little
use. Therefore, as Pericles has them all, it is wrong to blame
him.’
οὐδενὸς ἥσσων
—this
is all purely rhetorical, for no proof is offered of the
premise,
which might be disputed. This illustrates excellently
Aristotle's
remark that, whereas exact truth is the object of the syllogism,
probability is the object of the enthymeme.
φιλόπολις
—to
us philanthropy and cosmopolitanism mean far more than
citizenship
and patriotism; but in antiquity the former were vague
abstractions
which interested none but philosophers, whereas the latter were
realities for which every right-minded man was ready to
sacrifice
himself.
χρημάτων κρείσσων
—cf. c.
65,
8. Probably Pericles already knew that Cleon was preparing to charge
him with intercepting public money. Intr. p. lxxvi.
Ἐν ἴσῳ
—cf. 53, 4.
καὶ
—‘as’; so after
ἴσος
III. 14,
1; ὁμοῖος
VI. 11,
1; VIII. 76,
4.
ἐνεθυμήθη
—c.
40,
2.
οὐκ ἂν ὁμοίως
—
meiosis. Cf. for ὁμοίως,
c.
44,
3.
οἰκείως
—like an
οἰκεῖος, ‘as a loyal citizen,’ who regards himself as much
bound to the state as to his family.
τοῦδε
—this I am speaking of, viz. patriotism.
vικώμενος
— the reading adopted is far
more likely than the MSS. genitive, as the partic. corresponds to
γνοὺς and ἔχων. (The
gender would be masc., cf. c.
47,
4. So Kr., but recent edd., except Cr., make it neut., with τοῦδε for subj., against which it may be urged (a) τόδε νικᾶται means ‘this view is
rejected,’ unless τόδε is
personified, in which case (b) we
should expect χρήμασι also to be
personified, and to become ὑπὸ τῶν
χ. )
τούτου
— i.e.
χρημάτων, cf.
τοῦδε above.
ἀπόδοιτο
—there are readings πολοῖτο and
ἀπόλοιτο in inferior MSS.
Καὶ μέσως
—with μᾶλλον
ἑτέρων. ‘If you thought that I had somewhat more of these
qualifications than others.’ ‘Propria laus tantum abest ut sordeat
in ore virorum vere magnorum ut liabeat etiam ingenuae magnificaeque
simplicitatis plurimum.’ Doderlein.
μᾶλλον ἑτέρων—μέσως εἶπε καὶ οὐ σφόδρα, διὰ
τὸ φορτικόν. Schol.
αὐτὰ
—cf. c. 1. γε
—emphasizes τοῦ ἀδικεῖν: ‘you
followed my advice because you thought me φιλόπολις,
χρημάτων κρείσσων. Is it not then absurd to impute
ἀδικία to me?’ He seems again to refer to the plots of
Cleon.
Καὶ γὰρ
—this takes up τοῦ γε ἀδικεῖν, and belongs to πολλὴ
ἄνοια, ‘for undoubtedly it is intensely foolish to go
to war.’
αἵρεσις
—viz.
between peace and war.
πολεμῆσαι
ingressive, cf c.
15,
2, 58, 2.
εἰ δ’
—there is not any doubt about it;
cf. c.
39,
4, and Andoc. I. 33 εἰ μέν τι ἠσέβηκα
... εἰ
δὲ
οὐδὲν ἡμάρτηταί μοι, Aeschines, I. 112 εἰ μὲν ἦν ὁ ἀγὼν οὑτοσὶ ἐν πόλει ἐκκλήτῳ, ὑμᾶς ἂν
ἠξίωσα εἰ δ’ ὁ ἀγών ἐστιν Ἀθήνησιν ... ἀναμιμνησκειν προσήκει. ἦν
—viz. when the Spartan embassies were sent
threatening war. Intr. p. lxviii.
εὐθὺς
—with
ὑπακοῦσαι. ὁ φυγὼν
—Shil.
takes this as general, but then the pres. partic. would be expected.
Pericles alludes to those who had been opposed to war. κινδυνεύσαντας is emphatic.
Ὁ αὐτός εἰμι
—this, like ἐξίσταμαι, μεταβάλλετε, πει‐ σθῆναι,
μεταμέλειν, and ἐγκαρτερεῖν,
is left without further definition. The gloss ἃ
ἔγνωτε well gives the general idea of the passage
which is clear but exceedingly condensed.
ἀκεραίοις
—cf. c.
18,
5; before you had suffered from the invasion and the plague.
λόγον
—‘policy,’ as announced in c.
13,
and before the war.
ἐν τῷ ἀσθενεῖ τῆς γνώμης
—cf. c.
87,
3. Antiphon, Tet. A,
3.3
τὸ
θυμούμενον τῆς γνώμης, and c.
59,
3.
ὑμετέρῳ
—put with
ἀσθενεῖ rather than γνώμης
for the antithesis to ἐμόν. It is
not uncommon for a neut. adj. with art. to have an epithet; cf. IV. 87,
3 τῷ ὑμετέρῳ εὔνῳ. μὴ
—with φαίνεσθαι. διότι
—its
ordinary sense is ‘because,’ but often from Aristotle onwards =
‘that.’
τὸ λύπουν
—in order to secure a permanent
advantage in the future, it may be necessary to submit to some
temporary inconvenience (c.
53,
3), which a too hasty judgment may mistake for the only outcome of a
far-sighted policy.
ἔχει
—involves.
so ‘makes itself felt.’
ἅπασι
—with
δήλωσις; the individual's perception of the immediate
inconvenience being contrasted with the deferred
realisation by the nation of the advantage.
ἐξ ὀλιγοῦ
—c.
11,
4.
ταπεινὴ . ἐγκαρτερεῖν
—cf. I. 50,
5 νῆες
ὀλίγαι ἀμύνειν; v.
111,
2 τὰ
ὑπάρχοντα βραχέα περιγίγνεσθαι. Shil. points out that
this is not the same as ταπεινοτέρα
ἢ ὥστε
ἐγ.; being milder, it does not allege utter want of
endurance: ‘You are weak in patiently abiding the change.’
Παραλόγῳ
—that which is sudden and
unexpected— for instance death in certain mortal but lingering
diseases— does not necessarily overthrow one's original
calculations. Hence the addition of τὸ
...
ξυμβαῖνον to τὸ αἰφ. καὶ ἀ. ἄλλοις
—neut.
Ἀντιπάλοις
— = ἴσοις
τῷ μεγέθει αὐτῆς. ξ.
τὰς
μεγί‐ στας
—c.
2,
2.
ἐθέλειν
—Shil.'s excellent remark that ἐθέλω = ‘I am willing,’ βούλομαι = ‘I wish,’ needs this much
modification, that ἐθέλω is always
used by a superior to an inferior, just as they speak of the ‘will’
of the gods. (In Plat.
Gorg. 508 C, Shil. says a distinction is hardly
recognised: but there ὁ
βουλόμενος = ‘anyone who wishes,’ as usual, and ὁ
ἐθέλων = ‘anyone whose will and pleasure it is’—εἰμὶ
ἐπὶ τῷ βουλομένῳ ὤσπερ οἱ ἄτιμοι τοῦ ἐθέλοντος. At the
same time, the example shows that the meanings of the two do
overlap. Schmeizer on Plato, Phaedo, c. 50.)
ὑφίστασθαι
—
= ‘endure’ takes accus.: for meaning with dat., see L. and S.
ἀφανίζειν
— c.
34,
3.
ἐν ἴσῳ
— =
ὁμοίως. δικαιοῦσι
—c.
41,
5.
δόξης
—with
ἐλλείπει, as προσηκούσης
with ὀρεγόμενον, the order being
due to the elaborate antithesis.
ὅστις . . τὸν
—the change of expression
relieves the sentence. Isocr.
6, 90
έλέσθαι μὴ τὸ τούτοις
ῥᾷστον, ἀλλ’ ὃ πρέπον ἔσται. ἀπαλγήσαντας
—
only found in Thuc.: for the force of
ἀπὸ, cf. ἀπανθεῖν, ἀπέρδω,
ἀποτύπτω. τοῦ
κοινοῦ τῆς ς.
—c.
60,
4.
πόνον
—with ἀπέδειξα
ὑποπτευόμενον, the object being repeated in αὐτὸν owing to the length of the
sentence.
μὴ
— subordinate to ὑποπτευόμενον.
ὑπάρχον
—with
ἐνθυμηθῆναι, and both ἐς
τὴν
ἀρχὴν and μεγέθους πέρι
belong to ὑπάρχον, ‘your
possession of which, as bearing on your empire in respect of its
greatness,’
i.e. ‘the existence of which, as it bears on the greatness
of your empire.’
οὔτ’ ἐγὼ
—sc. ἐχρησάμην
αὐτῷ.
κομπωδεστέραν
—‘as
the pretension it involves is rather arrogant.’
παρὰ τὸ εἰκὸς
—‘unduly.’
Οἴεσθε
—in this passage the topic τὸ δυνατὸν is used; Index, s.v.
τόποι. μερῶν
—depends
on τοῦ ἑτέρου. ἐπὶ πλέον
—sc. νέμεσθαι (c.
29,
2), ‘to any further extent you wish.’
ἄλλο
—exclusive, cf. c.
14,
1; ‘nor any nation either.’ βασιλεὺς
is not the Persian king, but goes with οὐκ
ἔ. ὅστις. οὐδείς. τῶν ἐν τ. π.
—cf.
c.
41,
3.
ὥστε
—the
value of Attica cannot be compared with the value of the sea.
οὐ κατὰ .. χρείαν
—‘not to be measured by the
advantage derived from,’
i.e. is much greater than that. Shil. quotes many examples
of οὐ or μὴ
κατὰ meaning superior
to; the same may mean inferior to,
as in the phrase οὐ κατ’ ἀξίαν
common in tragedy.
ὧν
—sc.
ἐστερημένοι. οὐδ’ εἰκὸς
—neque
decet, c.
10,
1.
χαλ. φέρειν
—sc.
ἐστερημένοι. [
αὐτῶν
]—probably due to a note ἐστερῆσθαι αὐτῶν. μᾶλλον
ἢ οὐ
—cf. III. 36,
4 πόλιν
διαφθεῖραι μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους. Shil. notes that ἢ implies a negative, just as πρὶν does (A. J. of
Phil. II. B. L. G. on
πρἱν): and all sentences implying a neg. may be
strengthened by an expressed neg. M. T. 815.
Thus κινδυνεύω
περὶ τοῦ μὴ σωθῆναι means the same thing as κινδυνεύω περὶ τοῦ σωθῆναι.
κηπίον
—a parterre of
flowers. (The other view that κηπίον
means a mode of dressing the hair is due to Aelius Dionysius:
Eustath., p. 907, quotes Aelius, whose gloss also appears in
Photius, Suidas, and more than once in Scholia; cf. Pollux, II. 29 κῆπος
γὰρ οὐ μόνον φυταλιά, ἀλλὰ καὶ καλλσμὸς κόμης, κατ’
Αἰλιον Διονύσιον, καὶ κουρᾶς διάθεσις τῶν ἐν κεφαλῇ τριχῶν.
Θουκυδίδης
δὲ κηπίον φησι.)
ἐγκαλλώπισμα
—of display in dress. Cf.
Plato, Phaedo, p. 64 D τὰς ἄλλας τὰς περὶ τὸ σῶμα θεραπείας ... οἶον
ἱματίων διαφερόντων κτήσεις καὶ ὑποδημάτων καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους
καλλωπισμούς. γνῶναι
—sc. εἰκός. ἀντιλ. αὐτῆς
διασώσωμεν
—c.
13,
2.
ἀναληψομένην ... φιλεῖν
—the change of
construction is due to the change in the sense of γνῶναι, which at first = know, then =
judge or decide. M. T. 915.
ὑπακούσασι
—with gen. of a perpetual
attitude of submission, with dat. (61, 1) of
submission at a particular moment.
πατέρων
— the topic changes to τὸ συμφέρον. See 2 above. Demosth. 3,
36
μὴ παραχωρεῖν τῆς τάξεως ἣν
ὑμῖν οἱ πρόγονοι μετὰ πολλῶν καὶ καλῶν κινδύνων κτησάμενοι κατέλιπον κατ’
ἀμφότερα
—i.e.
κατὰ τὸ
κατασχεῖν καὶ διασώσαντες παραδοῦναι. But, as applied
to his hearers, κατασχεῖν does not
mean to acquire new empire, which Pericles discouraged; but to
assert their mastery over their existing empire, and not think of
surrendering it to Sparta:
κατασχεῖν = both to get and to keep.
φανῆναι
—sc.
εἰκός. μετὰ πόνων
—cf. I. 70,
8 μετἀ πόνων καὶ κινδύνων
μοχθεῖν, ib.
19, 3 μετὰ κινδύνων τὰς μελετὰς
ποιεῖδθαι. When abstract sing. nouns are used in these
phrases (Thuc. has examples), as μετ’
ἀληθείας, the art. is rare.
προσέτι
—once Thuc. uses πρὸς as an adv.,
III.
58,
5: elsewhere προσέτι. αὐτὰ
—c.
36,
4.
αἴσχιον
—Demosth.
2,
26
πολὺ ῥᾷον ἔχοντας φυλάττειν ἢ
κτήσασθαι. ἔχοντας—δεξαμένους, while
ἀφαιρεθῆναι is the opposite of κατασχεῖν
καὶ διασώσασθαι. ἰέναι
ὁμόσε
—cf. c.
81,
5, obviam
ire.
φρονήματι καταφρονήματι —παρονομασία,
in the style of Gorgias. Intr. p. lii. The antithesis
between confidence and disdain is an antithesis between an instinctive feeling of superiority and a
consciousness arising from
knowledge of the enemy's inferiority. Cf. Livy, XXI. 41 non
eo solum animo quo adversus alios hostes soletis pugnare velim; sed
cum indignatione quadam atque ira, velut si servos videatis vestros
arma repente contra vos ferentes.
Αὔχημα
—Intr. p. liii. αὔχημα is not
identified with
φρόνημα, but is substituted as the natural result of
it.
καὶ
—‘mere.’
ἀμαθίας εὐτυχοῦς
—fortune sometimes
favours cowardly fools, and produces in them a habit of boasting.
Pericles probably meant Cleon, and Thuc. suggests him by καὶ (= ‘even’) δειλῷ
τινι. καταφρόνησις ὃς
ἂν
—cf. the
definition in c.
44,
1. Sc. τούτῳ ἐγγίγνεται.
γνώμῃ
—certain
knowledge, contrasted with ἀμαθία εὐ.;
again suggesting Cleon, who made the un-Socratic discovery that ἀμαθία is
ἀρετή! Intr. p. lxxiii.
Τόλμαν
—one of the effects of καταφρόνησις, but not always of
φρόνημα, which is compatible with cowardice.
ἡ ξύνεσις
—stands very close to γνώμη, but only in the intellectual
sense of clear insight and circumspection. For the principle that
true courage is impossible without
ξύνεσις, cf. c.
40,
4. (This illustrates the close connection between Ethics and
Metaphysics, so often insisted upon by modern thinkers.)
ἐκ τοῦ ὑπέρφρονος
—with ἐχυρωτέραν παρέχεται. ‘Intelligence
gives greater solidity to courage as the result of a consciousness
of superiority’; such a consciousness of superiority is therefore
desirable.
ἐλπίδι
—cf. V. 102
ἐπιστάμεθα τὰ τῶν πολέμων
ἔστιν ὅτε κοινοτέρας τὰς τύχας λαμβάνοντα ἢ κατὰ τὸ διαφέρον
ἑκατέρων
πλῆθος. ‘Courage trusts not to hope because fortune
has hitherto been fair (that is the strength of the helpless);
rather it trusts to insight based on a survey of realities; and that
is a far safer prophet.’ In this elaborate antithesis (a) blind hope is contrasted with clear
insight, (b) the foundation on which hope is
built is contrasted with the foundation on which insight is built,
the one being treacherous (
τύχη), the other being firm, (c)
there is a contrast, in the form of chiasmus, between ἐλπίδι and
ὑπάρχοντα, and between
τύχης and γνώμη. ἀπὸ
τῆς ὁμοίας
τύχης
—referring
to 4 above; cowards boast when
τύχη has been more than
ὁμοία to them: the helpless hope on when τύχη has been as much as ὁμοία to them; for an equal share of
Heaven's favours is enough to make them suppose they will not be
destroyed But brave men, trusting in
γνώμη, can bear up even under a temporary withdrawal
of their share of Heaven's favour (c.
64,
2). (These words, if retained after τὴν
τόλμαν, give no sense, since there is no reason why
courage should come ἀπὸ ... τύχης
, or why the effect of insight on courage should be
limited by such a condition.)
ἀπόρῳ
—neut.
γνώμῃ
—Thuc. does not often contrast γνώμη with
τύχη, by which
γνώμη may always be over-ridden. Intr. p. xli.; I. 144, 4; V.
75
τυχῃ
μὲν κακιζόμενοι, γνώμῃ δὲ οἱ αὐτοὶ ἔτι ὄντες. It is
common in the orators, as Antiphon, 5, 92, Andoc.
1, 140 , Lys. 34, 2, Isocr. 2,
30.
Τῆς τε
—the topic changes to τὸ συμφέρον; see c.
62,
3, Index s.v.
τόποι. εἰκὸς
—decet.
τῷ τιμωμένῳ
—c.
59,
3. ‘You are bound to support the dignity which the state has
obtained through our empire.’
ὑπὲρ ἅπαντας
—not a common use of ὑπέρ. Cf. Isocr. ep.
4, 8
τοὺς ὑπὲρ αὑτοὺς ὄντας. τιμὰς
—which,
though belonging to the state, directly benefit every citizen; in
those times the city was everything, the citizen nothing. Cf.
60, 3.
περὶ δουλείας ἀγωνίζεσθαι
—as remarked on c.
62,
3, sentences like ἀγὼν περὶ τοῦ δοκεῖν
ἀδίκως
ἐπιθυμεῖν and ἀγὡν περὶ
τοῦ μὴ
δοκεῖν
ἀ. ἐ. are identical in meaning. In the same way, with
all verbs or nouns implying a
contest, the noun with περὶ
may describe either the object which the combatant referred to
wishes to obtain, or the disaster he wishes to avoid, the two being
the same thing regarded from different views: thus Lysias' ἐναντιοῦσθαι
περὶ έλευθερίας (13, 17) is the same as ἀγωνίζεσθαι περὶ δουλείας. Cf. Lys.
3, 44
ἀγωνίζεσθαι περὶ θανάτου;
21, 20 ἀ. περὶ ἀσεβείας. Demosth. 1, 5
οὐ περὶ
δόξης κίνδυνος άλλ’ ἀνδραποδισμοῦ τῆς πατρίδος.
δουλείας
—i.e. dependence on Sparta, as δ. often denotes merely the opposite of αὐτονομία. κινδύνου
ὧν
— periculo ob offensas in imperio contractas,
danger due to the hatred to which you have been exposed in that
empire. ὧν = τούτων ἅ, cognate accus. to
ἀπήχθησθε. (One or two edd. prefer to take ὧν as masc., danger from those in
governing whom you have incurred hatred; but that does not agree
well with the abstract nature of the whole passage.)
Εἴ τις
—referring
to the combination to which the overtures to Sparta were due.
καὶ τόδε
—i.e.
τὸ ἐκστῆναι τῆς
ἀρχῆς, ‘if that is the
honourable part that any of you, prompted by his present
apprehension and an indolent spirit, wishes to play.’ τόδε is cognate accus. to ἀνδραγαθίζεται. Cf. 1 above. The
friends of peace did not admit that they wished ἐκστῆναι τῆς ἀρχῆς, but Pericles
asserts that their policy would lead to loss of empire and even
worse disasters.
ἀπραγμοσύνῃ
—
dat. of manner. The word is purposely chosen to include all who
were
playing into the hands of Sparta, if only by their apathy. Cf.
Intr.
p. lxxiii.
ὡς τυραννίδα
—it is remarkable that
Cleon, who had done so much to get up the attack on Pericles, utters
the same sentiment, III. 40.
Cleon was really by no means anxious for peace (see
Intr. p. lxxiv. fol.), and it is probable that Pericles here points
out the absurdity of Cleon's present attitude by adopting a phrase
of which all knew that he was fond; leaving the friends of
ἀπραγμοσύνη to settle matters with the friends of τυραννὶς as best they could.
ἄδικον δοκεῖ
—viz.
‘to the world.’ Pericles does not himself assert that the empire is
a despotism, or that it was unjustly acquired: he alludes to an
opinion then especially prevalent.
ἐπικίνδυνον
—sc.
ἐστί.
Οἱ τοιοῦτοι
—i.e.
οἱ τόδε ἀνδραγαθιζόμενοι. ἑτέρους
πείσαντες
—‘if they
should get others to adopt their views.’
καὶ
—with τέ
, sive ... sive. Observe the ἰσόκωλον on each side of καί, cf. c.
40,
1, and the ὁμοιοτέλευτα in ἀπολέσειαν and
οἰκήσειαν. (These similar endings are not common in Thuc.:
there are about a dozen in this book.)
εἴ που
—the second protasis to πόλιν ἀπολέσειαν. ἐπὶ σφῶν
αὐτῶν
—‘by
themselves,’ a hint that if they want their ideas carried out, they
had better go and live somewhere else. For the phrase, cf. v. 67
,
1; VI. 40,
2 αὐτὴ
έφ’ αὺτῆς; VIII.
63,
4.
τὸ ἄπραγμον
—‘indolence is not secure
unless it be ranged beside activity; nor yet is it expedient in a
sovereign state, but only in one that is in subjection, to seek
safety by submission.’ τὸ
ἄπραγμον and τὸ δραστήριον
are for οἱ ἀπράγμονες, οἱ δραστήριοι.
Cf. c.
44,
1.
σῴζεται ... τεταγμένον
—military words. If
indolent persons wish to come out of the struggle safe, they had
better take sides with the active; i.e. the
peace party can only gain a secure peace by supporting the war
party, instead of making overtures to the enemy. Cf. Demosth.
6, 25
οὐ φυλάξεσθ’ ὅπως μὴ πολέμου
ζητοῦντες ἀπαλλαγῆναι δεσπότην εὕρητε;
ξυμφέρει
—subject ὰσφαλῶς δουλεύειν, before
which τὸ is omitted, as in c.
35,
1, 39, 4.
ἀσφαλῶς δ.
— this is what τὸ ἄπραγμον really means, says
Pericles, it is not σωτηρία, as
the friends of peace pretend, but
δουλεία : ἀσφαλῶς
corresponds to οὐ σῴζεται, δουλεύειν
to μὴ μετὰ τοῦ δραο τηρίου τεταγμένον,
which shows that the adv. is emphatic.
δουλεύειν
—cf. 1 above; a state now ἄρχουσα becomes a slave by submitting.
Cf. c.
42,
4. (For other views of this passage, see other editions.)
Δῑ ὀργῆς
—c.
13,
2.
εἰκὸς ἦν
—sc.
δρᾶσαι. Cf. c.
11,
8.
πρᾶγμα ... γεγενημένον
—for the change to a
neut. expression cf. c.
47,
3.
πρᾶγμα is in apposition to the sentence generally, as
in Andoc. 1, 39
τοῦθ’
ὑπέθετο, δεινότατον πρᾶγμα οἶμαι. ἐλπίδος
—cf.
c.
11,
6, 85, 4, 102, 3.
κρεῖσσον
—cf. c.
41,
3.
οἶδ’ ὅτι
—cf. εὖ
οἶδ’ ὅτι, and δῆλον ὅτι. μέρος
τι
—‘considerably.’ [τι ] εὖ
πράξητε
—either εὖ
ποιεῖν, εὖ πράττειν, etc., or ἀγαθόν
τι ποιεῖν,
ἀγαθόν τι πράττειν, etc., are the
phrases. For the latter, cf. Isocr. 2, 20
, Aristoph.
Eccles. 108 .
ἀναθήσετε
—‘you intend to attribute it to
me.’ So the fut. indic. with εἰ
may follow optat. with ἄν, and
even alternate with εἰ and optat.,
as Andoc.
1, 30
δεινὸν ἂν εἴη, εἰ ὲμοὶ
ὀργίζοισθε
καὶ τὴν διαβολὴν ...
κρείττω τῆς ἀληθείας ἡγήσεσθε.
Φἑρειν τε
—another
reason why their indignation is unmerited is that the plague is
sent
by a higher power.
τὰ δαιμόνια
—this phrase, for τὰ τῆς τύχης, only occurs here, and, as
Cl. says, it is probably borrowed from the language of philosophers.
Cf. θεῖος, contrasted with ἀνθρώπινος, in Plato; also Andoc. 1, 139
κίνδυνοι
θεῖοι) (κ. ἀνθρώπινοι.
ἀναγκαίως
—‘with resignation.’ The inevitable should be endured, not argued
over.
τά τε ἀπὸ
—there is chiasmus with I above; οἱ ὲναντίοι, ἡ νόσος, τὰ δαιμόνια, τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν π. ἐν ἔθει ἦν
—
‘was the habit of.’
ἐν ὑμῖν
—‘by your act.’ Cf. c.
35
,
1.
κωλυθῇ
—‘let it not be impeded,’ i.e. ‘let not your action check it.’
Διὰ τὸ
—belongs to
εἴκειν and ἀνηλωκέναι.
(The Schol., who makes ἀνηλωκέναι
depend on
γνῶτε, has the honour of having misled Shil.)
πλεῖστα δὲ
—‘has never yielded ..., but has sacrificed.’
μεγίστην δὴ
—antithesis to ὄνομα μέγιστον. Notice the frequent use
of superlatives, esp. μέγιστος and πλεῖστος. Cf. c.
11,
1.
ἢν καὶ νῦν
—‘even if, in our present
condition (i.e. in spite of our present
power), we should give way at all. Pericles admits the possibility
of a decline of the empire.’
καὶ ἐλασσοῦσθαι
—‘to
decay as well (as to grow).’
καταλελείψεται
—permanent result in fut. M. T. 78.
Ἑλλήνων τε ὅτι
—epexegesis of ἧς =
δυνάμεως. Cf. Plat. Rep. v. p.
469 B Ἕλληνας Ἑλληνίδας πόλεις
ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι. ὅτι
—put
late, because of the emphasis on Ἑλλήνων. πολέμοις
—temporal.
Cf. c.
13,
9.
καθ’ ἑκάστους
—depends, as though it were
one word, on πρός. τοῖς
πᾶσιν
—c.
11,
6.
Καίτοι
—‘now
it is true that,’ making an admission that increase of power
does
not increase the number of friends. The objection is answered in
5
below. (Only Bäumlein and Sta. make this clear.)
ἀπράγμων
—referring to other states, yet
with a hint at οἱ
ἀπράγμονες in Athens.
μέμψαιτ’ ἄν
— corresponds to the fut. ζηλώσει, φθονήσει. καὶ αὐτὸς
—with δρᾶν, ‘he who is ambitious
like ourselves.’
ζηλώσει
—note the difference between ζῆλος and
φθόνος. L. and S.
s.v.
ζῆλος. εἰ
...
κέκτηται
—=ὅστις κέκτηται=ὁ
κεκτημένος.
Ἐν τῷ παρόντι
—‘for a time,’ i.e. until other nations become habituated to
it. Cf. c.
41,
2.
ἕτεροι ἑτέρων
—c.
51,
1 and 4. Cf. I. 84
διαφέρειν
ἄνθρωπον ἀνθρώπου and 3 above; Livy, XXI. 10, 4 ex bellis bella serendo.
ὅστις ... λαμβάνει
—=ὁ
λαμβάνων. ἐπὶ μεγίστοις
—cf.
c.
29,
3 ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ. ἡ δὲ
κ.τ.λ.—there is only one idea in the subject: lit. ‘that
which is the splendour of the present remains also the glory of the
future in memory for ever,’ by which he means great power, τὰ
μέγιστα above. In the present,
such power is viewed with dislike, though it is a splendid thing to
have; but hatred is short-lived, and in the
future will be changed into admiration and respect. Even if
this great power decline, it is still remembered. The second member
is the more important.
Ἔς τε τὸ μέλλον
—there is chiasmus here; παραυτίκα, ἐς τὸ ἔπειτα, ἐς τὸ μέλλον, ἐς τὸ
αὐτίκα. προγνόντες
—‘providing
for future glory and present escape from disgrace, secure both by
making an effort now.’
ἐπικηρυκεύεσθε
—see c.
1
ἐπεμείγνυντο. Cf. ἐπιδικἀζεσθαι. οἵτινες
—with
this conclusion, cf. the close of Nicias' speech, VI. 14
τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ’ εἶναι, ὃς ἂν κ.τ.λ. πρὸς
—propter, c.
91,
4.
οὗτοι
—c.
58,
3.
καὶ πόλεων καὶ ἰδιωτῶν
—sums up the lesson of the
whole speech. The interests of the individual cannot be considered
apart from those of the community. Cf. Isocr.
3, 51.
Τῆς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν
—‘the
indignation directed against him.’
δεινῶν
—here regarded from the point of
view of the sufferers; in
77, 1 from that of those who cause the suffering.
ἀπάγειν τὴν γ.
—cf. c.
59,
3.
Ἀνεπείθοντο
—c.
14,
1.
ὁ μὲν
—cf. c.
21,
3.
ἀπ’ ἐλασσόνων
—‘having less to start
with,’ i.e. before the war.
ἐστέρητο
—so Andoc.
3, 8; Aeschin. 2, 173 of this
period.
{ἐν} οἰκοδομίαις
—‘consisting in buildings
and costly furniture,’ with
κτήματα. Cf. Dinarch. 1, 5
ἡ ἐν τῷ λέγειν δύναμις. τὸ δὲ
μέγιστον
—‘above all,’
adverbial accus.
Πρότερον ... πρὶν
—this insertion of πρότερον is due to the comparative and
negative nature of πρίν. It is
very common. M. T. 658.
χρήμασιν
—cf. IV. 65
φυγῇ ἐζημίωσαν. For the probable
circumstances see Intr. p. lxxvi.
Ὕστερον
—Intr.
p. lxxvii.
οὐ πολλῷ
—about
six months.
ὅπερ φιλεῖ
—Thuc.'s objections to a
thorough-going democracy are (1) that it is uncertain in its policy,
(2) that it encourages rivalry among demagogues, and consequently
party strife. Cf. Burke,
Reflections, ‘Not being wholly unread in the authors who
had seen the most of those constitutions, I cannot help concurring
with their opinion, that an absolute democracy, no more than
absolute monarchy, is to be reckoned among the legitimate forms of
government.’
πάντα
—i.e.
made him στρατηγὸς
αὐτοκράτωρ. ὧν
... ἤλγει
—cf. Eur. Hec.
1256 παιδὸς ἀλγεῖν, a poetical
construction. Supply ταῦτα, accus.
of respect, to
ἀμβλύτεροι, and to πλείστου
ἄξιον. ἡ ξύμπασα
—the
state is contrasted with the individuals of which it consists. Cf.
c.
7,
2. ξύμπασα
ἡ would contrast the whole with part of the city.
Ὅσον τε ... ἐπεί τε
—
i.e. throughout his administra- tion, both before and after
the outbreak of war. For τε ... τε,
cf. c.
22,
1, 64, 2, 6.
προύστη
—Pericles
had been decidedly the first man in Athens since the ostracism
of
Thucydides, son of Melesias, in 444 B.C.
ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ
—i.e.
the Thirty Years' peace of 445 B.C. (So Bloomfield rightly; for the
period 458-445 was regarded as
πόλεμος, Andoc. 3,
6 ; Aeschin. 2, 174.
Pericles' decisive appearance dates from B.C. 468, but as πόλεμος below cannot include B.C.
458-445, εἰρήνη cannot include
468-458.)
διεφύλαξεν
—the aor. gives the result of
his policy. Cf. c.
49,
5. Andocides and Aeschines dilate on the advantages gained by Athens
during the peace.
μεγίστη
—attributes the greatness of
Athens, on which Pericles so often insisted, to Pericles himself.
Andoc. and Aesch. wrongly assign the creation of the reserve fund
(c.
24
)
to the period of the peace. Andoc., being a consummate liar,
probably did this on purpose, and misled Aesch. and puzzled some
modern historians.
ὁ δὲ
— cf. c.
46,
1. M. T. 564.
δύναμιν
—sc. τῆς
πόλεως. Cf. 13 below. Unfortunately Pericles failed to
notice two sources of weakness: (1) the growing discontent of the
allies, (2) the lack of rising politicians who would carry on his
policy after his death.
Ἐπεβίω
—‘lived
beyond’ the beginning of the war.
δ. ἔτη καὶ μ. ἓξ
—Intr.
p. xvii.
ἐγνώσθη
—here
follows a defence of Pericles' war policy. The proofs offered of
his
wisdom are (1) the reversal of his policy led to disaster, (2)
in
spite of that reversal, Athens held out against great odds until
ruined by internal dissensions. This may prove that his policy
was
good, but Thuc. goes too far in 13 when he implies that Athens
would
certainly have succeeded if Pericles' advice had been followed.
ἡ πρόνοια ἐς
—cf. c.
64,
6, and for the order, c.
52,
1.
Ἡσυχάζοντας
—i.e.
they were to adopt the policy of wearing out Sparta, and not to
attempt to bring the war to an end by a few battles.
ναυτικὸν θεραπεύοντες
—the
object of Athens was to obtain the recognition of her maritime
supremacy, as it existed in 431.
ἀρχἡν μἡ ἐπικτωμένους
—
not to attempt conquests while the war lasted.
τῇ πόλει κινδυνεύειν
—‘endanger the existence
of the state,’ by distant undertakings or great land
battles.
οἱ δὲ
—other ancient authors contrasted
Pericles with the demagogues who followed him, as Isocr. 8, 127, [Aristot.] Rep. Ath. 28 ἕως Π.
προειστήκει τοῦ δήμου βελτίω τὰ κατὰ τὴν πολιτείαν ἦν, τελευτήσαντος
δὲ Περικλέους πολὺ χείρω. ἔξω τοῦ
πολέμου
—‘things
which seemed to have no connection with the war,’ but really had;
e.g. the rivalry between politicians, which led to bad
government and consequent mismanagement.
σφίσι
—for σφίσιν
αὐτοῖς as c.
4,
1.
κατὰ
—cf. 11 below.
τοὺς ξυμμάχους
—
by producing ill-feeling towards Athens among the allies.
κατορθούμενα
—reflecting
on the selfish policy of Cleon and Alcibiades.
βλάβη κ.
—‘proved injurious.’ βλάβη sums up τὰ
κακῶς
πεπολιτευμένα, the result of which was seen in the
Decelean war.
Ἀξιώματι
—c.
37,
1.
χρημἄτων δ. ἀδωρότατος
— Thuc. again alludes
to Pericles' trial. Cf. c.
60,
5.
ἐλευθέρως
—cf. c.
37,
2, ‘while respecting their liberty.’
οὐ μᾶλλον
—‘instead
of.’
διὰ τὸ μὴ . . λέγειν
—this is answered by ἔχων. Cf. v.
16,
1 διὰ τὸ εὐτυχεῖν parallel to νομίζων, VII. 70,
4 διὰ τὸ φεύγειν parallel to ἐπιπλέουσα. ἐξ οὐ π.
—contrast
c.
17,
2 μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ. ἐπ’
ἀξιώσει
—c.
34,
6. Cf. ἐπ’
αἰσχρᾷ αἰτίᾳ
VII.
48,
4; and Livy, XXI. 49
haud cum imparatis, for cum haud imparatis.
πρὸς ὀργήν
—‘angrily.’ (Arnold translates
‘so as to excite their anger,’ because πρὸς
ὀργήν corresponds to πρὸς ἡδονήν;
which no one would think of translating ‘willingly.’ But neither
does πρὸς
ἡδονὴν = ‘so as to excite their pleasure’; rather πρὸς
ἡ. λέγειν = ‘to speak pleasantly,’ ‘to say pleasant
things’: moreover Arnold presses the antithesis too closely. ἀντειπεῖν is not the opposite of λέγειν.) Cf. III. 43,
5; VIII. 27,
6. For Pericles' freedom of speech, cf Eupolis,
frag.
τὸ κέντρον ἐγκατέλιπε τοῖς
ἀκροωμένοις, comparing Pericles to a bee.
Γοῦν
—‘at
any rate,’ introducing an illustration which explains in what
sense
the preceding statement is to be taken.
κατέπλησσεν
—later
demagogues, on the contrary, tried only to humour the people.
ἐγίγνετό τε
—‘and
so it came about that.’ This is an explicit statement that
Pericles
owed his ascendancy to the influence he had acquired by his
abilities.
λόγῳ μὲν
—such a tempered democracy was
the ideal constitution of Thuc. Cf. VIII. 24,
4, 97, 2.
ὑπὸ ... ἀρχή
—the
verbal substantive constructed like a pass. partic.
Οἱ δὲ ὕστερον
—answering ἐκεῖνος μὲν in 8 above. So ἴσοι
... ὄντες corresponds to δυνατὸς
ὢν. αὐτοὶ ... πρὸς ἀλλὴλους
—might
have been αὐτοὶ πρὸς ἁτούς. Cf. c.
5,
5 on διαβουλευόμενων. καθ’
ἡδονὰς
—depends on ἐνδιὁόναι, ‘so as to suit any popular
whim.’
καὶ τὰ πράγματα
—
i.e. to gain their object they were ready
not only to flatter the people, but even to place the administration
of the state entirely in their hands.
ἐνδιδόναι
—after
ἐτράποντο ‘they set themselves to.’
Ἄλλα
—e.g. the
rejection of the Spartan overtures for peace in 410 B.C., and the
aggressive warfare of 424 B.C.
ὡς
—‘as
is natural’ when the administration of a great empire is
entirely in
the hands of the people.
ὁ ... πλοῦς
—sc. ἡμαρτήθη,
ὁ πλοῦς being viewed as an ἔργον
τοῦ πολέμου. Cf. III.
67
ἁμαρτανόμενα
ἔργα, Plato, Rep. VIII. p. 544
D πόλεις ἡμαρτημένας. (ἡμαρτήθη is not impersonal, a constr.
nearly confined to perf. pass.)
ἁμάρτημα πρὸς οὓς
—the construction is
similar to c.
44,
1 τὸ δ’
εὐτυχἐς, οἳ ἂν κ.τ.λ., 62, 4 καταφρόνησις δὲ ὃς ἂν κ.τ.λ.; thus ἁμάρτημα ἦν πρὸς οὓς ἐ. follows the
construction of ἡμἀρτανον πρὸς οὓς ἐ.
‘It was not so much an error of judgment with regard to the people
whom they were intending to attack; the blunder they made was rather
that the people responsible for the expedition did not consult the
interests of those who had been sent out in their subsequent
measures.’
ὅσον ...
ἐπιγιγνώσκοντες
—sc. ἁμάρτημα ἦν. Cf.
IV.
26
αἴτιον ἦν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι προειπόντες. οἱ ἐκπέμψαντες
—the
extreme democrats.
οὐ τὰ πρόσφορα
—of the measures taken after the mutilation of the Hermae, esp.
the
recall of Alcibiades.
κατὰ
—‘in consequence of intrigues for
the leadership of the democracy.’ Cf. κατὰ
πενίαν c.
37,
1. Thuc. alludes to the position of δήμου
προστάτης, recognised leader of the popular party. The
list, according to [Arist.] Rep. Ath. 28, is
Solon, Pisistratus, Cleisthenes, Xanthippus, Themistocles,
Ephialtes, Pericles; after whom the popular leaders degenerated with
Cleon and Cleophon.
τά τε
—‘they
conducted the military operations without vigour.’ Thuc. shifts
the
blame of the disaster from Nicias to the home authorities.
ἀμβλύτερα
—with
less vigour than they had since the war broke out.
τὰ περὶ
—accus. of respect; έταρἁχθησαν being ‘ingressive.’
πρῶτον
—i.e. for
the first time during the war. What ruined Athens in the war was the
internal discord that broke out after Pericles' death.
Σφαλέντες ... παρασκευῇ
—for
the dat. cf. 7 above.
δέκα
—i.e.
413-404 B.C.
μὲν
—answered by καὶ
οὐ πρότερον, just as we sometimes find μὲν ... τέ, τε .. δέ.
βασιλέως
—
Darius.
προσγενομένῳ
—from
407 B.C.
πρότερον ... ἢ
— cf. c.
40,
2. M. T. 653.
ἐν σφίσι
—for ἐν
σφίσιν αὐτοῖς. See c.
4,
1.
κατὰ
—cf. 11 above. [περιπεσόντες ]—περιπίπτειν
regularly takes the dat., and no case in which it takes any prep.
but ἐν is known The phrase συμφοραῖς περιπεσεῖν is very common,
and probably a commentator wrote this in the margin to illustrate κατὰ .. ἐσφάλησαν .
Τοσοῦτον—μὲν might have followed.
ἐπερίς‐ σευσε
—sc.
ταῦτα from ἀφ’ ὧν,
‘such an abundance of resources had Pericles, by means of which he
of himself foresaw.’
καὶ πάνυ
—c.
11,
6, 51, 2.
αὐτῶν
—‘alone.’
πολέμῳ
— c.
13,
9.
Ἀριστεὺς—ὁ Ἀδειμάντου, Herod. VII.
137. Herod. digresses to tell the story of this embassy, and mentions
Aristeus, Aneristus, and Nicolaus.
Πρατόδαμος
—see not.
crit. Mss. often Atticise un-Attic names.
ἰδίᾳ
—probably he represented the philo.
Lacoman party at Argos; the city was neutral, c.
9,
2.
Σιτάλκην
—c. 29. στρατεῦσαι ἐπὶ
—
‘send an army to relieve.’
ἦν ... πολιορκοῦν
—c.
12,
2. ἦν =
versabatur, ‘was engaged.’
δῑ ἐκείνου
—‘with
his aid.’
Φαρνάκην
—satrap
of Dascylium, the N. satrapy of Asia Minor, Sardis being the S.
satrapy.
ἀναπέμψειν
—‘escort inland’; cf. ἀναβαίνειν.
Τὴν ἐκείνου πόλιν
—
i.e. Athens.
τὸ μέρος
—with
βλάψωσιν, ‘do their hest to injure,’ adverbial accus.
Περαιώσειν
—‘send them across.’ No
subject is given for
ἔμελλον, but ‘Sitalces and Sadocus’ has to be supplied
from the context.
πρὶν ἐσβαίνειν
—generally πρὶν takes aor. infin.; the pres. means
‘before the embarkation began.’
καὶ ἐκέλευσεν
—sc. τοὺς
πεμφθέντας. He ‘had given orders’ before the
expedition started.
Τὰ ... τῶν ἐπὶ Θ.
—‘the difficulties in Chalcidice.’
Aristeus had been sent with 2000 men from Corinth to aid Potidaea
when it revolted, I. 60.
πάντας
—probably Cleon
was responsible for the death of the Spartan envoys. They should
have been kept in prison as hostages. Pericles had no voice now in
the government, and Thuc. hints that he views this act as a blunder.
δικαιοῦντες
—c.
41,
5.
οἷσπερ . . ὑπῆρξαν
—attraction for ἅπερ ὑπῆρξαν. Shil. quotes Dem. 19,
321
τὰς εὐεργεσίας ἃς ὑπῆρξαν
εἰς
ὑμᾶς , lsocr. 14, 57
τὴν
αὐτὴν
εὐεργεσίαν ἥνπερ αὐτοὶ τυγχάνομεν είς ὑμᾶς ὑπάρξαντες
, Aeschin. 2, 26
τὰς εὐεργεσίας ἃς ὑμεῖς ὑπήρξατε. οὓς
ἔλαβον
—probably some
special occasion is here referred to, and the merchants
were captured by privateers.
πάντας δὴ
—‘without exception,’ δὴ strengthening πάντας. Cf. c.
77,
2.
μηδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων
—c.
72,
1.
Ἀναστήσαντες
—cf. c.
96,
1.
πολλοὺς is attracted to the partic, and stands for
πολλοί, by a common idiom.
Ἄργος
—the
Peloponnesians were very anxious to weaken the influence of
Athens
on the west coast, as they wanted to improve their means of
communication with Sicily.
Ἤρξατο πρῶτον
—c.
36,
1, 48, 1. the account which follows is inserted
to clear up an uncertainty which existed in Thuc.'s time with regard
to the history of the northern Argos.
Ἀ. τὴν ἄλλην
—Intr.
p. xxxvi.
ἀρεσκόμενος τῇ
— the pass. of ἀρέσκω is only found in Herod. and
Thuc. of Attic writers.
τῇ ... καταστάσει
—he
found that his brother Alcmaeon had killed their mother
Eriphyle.
Emigration was then the last resource of the discontented.
ὀνομόσας
—the time of the partic. is not
here past relatively to the verb
ἔκτισε, but is comcident with it. M.
T. 150.
Μεγίστη .. δυνατωτάτους
—cf. c.
64,
3;
μέγεθος of the size,
δύναμις of the influence of a state.
Ὑπὸ ξ. . πιεζόμενοι
—c.
47,
4.
ἡλληνίσθησαν
—
‘adopted the Greek language, which they now speak.’
τὴν νῦν γ.
—cognate
accus.
ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀ. ξυνοικησάντων
—‘as the result of this
joint settlement.’ Cf. c.
49,
4 and 2, 1. Ambracia was a colony of Corinth.
Ἀργείους
— = οἱ
Ἀμφίλοχοι of 7.
χρόνῳ
— = χρόνῳ
ὕστερον.
Φορμίωνα
—some
time before the Peloponnesian war.
Ἀμπρακιώτας
—those
in Argos.
αἱροῦσι ... καὶ
ἠνδραπόδισαν
—contrast c.
67,
3. See 2 below.
Ἡ ξ.
—c.
9,
4. It was very important to Athens.
Ἔχθραν ... ἐποιήσαντο
—act. of ἔχθρα ἐγένετο in 2 above.
ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ
—c.
65,
7.
Χαόνων
—see c.
80,
5.
τἡν δὲ πόλιν
—put before ὡς for the sake of the antithesis.
Αἵ τε ... ὅ τε ... καὶ ἄλλα τε
... καί
τινες
—there are two members to
this sentence, united by the first
καί: each of these two is bisected, the first by τε ... τε, the second by τε ... καί τινες. οὐδὲν μ.
ἀπανίστασαν
—‘did not
force the Athenians to raise the siege,’ any more than the embassies
sent by Sparta to Athens before the war demanding that the army
should be withdrawn from Potidaea. Intr. p. lxviii.
ἀπανίστημι is not found in any other Attic writer.
Herod. III. 156.
ἐπεγεγένητο
—cf. c.
4,
2.
ἀναγκαίας
—‘in
their straits for food.’ ‘Non pas nécessaire à la vie, mais
imposée
par la nécessité.’ Cr. Livy, XXI. 14 pacem magis necessariam
quam
aequam.
ἀλλήλων ἐγέγευντο
—Josephus, VI. 3, 3
wrongly calls such cannibalism a horror unheard of among Greeks.
With the austere brevity of Thuc.'s description contrast Macaulay's
account of the sufferings in Londonderry, Hist.
Eng. c. 12, but the propriety of the close of the picture,
where the story of ‘the fat man’ is introduced, may be questioned.
οὕτω δὴ
—c.
12,
4.
ἐπὶ σφίσι τ.
— ‘against’; contrast c.
90,
2. Cf. III. 13
αἱ δ’ ἐφ’ ἡμῖν τετάχαται.
Χενοφῶντι
—c.
79.
Ὁρῶντες μὲν ... ἀνηλωκυίας τε—μὲν is
answered by τε in I. 144,
2; III. 46,
2; IV. 32,
2. Cf. c.
65,
12.
ἐν
—belongs to τὴν
ταλαιπωρίαν; for the use cf. c.
3,
1.
ἐς τὴν π.
—Intr.
p. lxxvii.
Ἐπὶ τοῖσδε ξυνέβησαν, ἐξελθεῖν
—cf.
IV. 16
ναῦς παρα‐
δοῦναι κομίσαντας Ἀθηναίοις ... αἱ μὲν σπονδαὶ ἐπὶ τούτοις
ἐγένοντο. In VIII. 18
the imperative is used throughout the terms. ‘The men ... to go
out.’ The inf. is not for ἐπὶ τῷ
ἐξελθεῖν, but is the use noticed in c.
13,
1.
ξὺν ἑνὶ
—cum
singulis
vestimentis, Livy, XXI. 12.
γυναῖκας δὲ
—probably Thuc. is quoting
the actual terms; so he is not responsible for what seems at first
an odd correction of
γυναῖκας above, but is quite suited to the cumbrous
diction of officials. ‘With one garment, except the women.’
Ἄνευ αὐτῶν
—injussu
suo or privato consilio.
ξυνέ‐ βησαν
—might have been ξυμβαῖεν, as in 21,
3. M. T. 713, 714.
ᾗ ἐβούλοντο
—
Recta,
ἐκρατήσαμεν ἂν
ᾗ
ὲβουλόμεθα, whereas ᾖ
βούλοιντο would represent ᾗ
ἂν βουλώμεθα. The sentence is equivalent to κρατήσαντες
ἂν ἐχρησάμεθα τῇ πόλει ᾗ ἐβουλόμεθα. Cf. c.
4,
7.
ἐποίκους
—c.
27,
1. See on c.
101,
6.
Ταῦτα μὲν ... καὶ
—the break between μὲν and τοῦ
δ’, c.
71,
is certainly not violent enough to warrant the supposition that καὶ δεύτερον ἔτος κ.τ.λ. is spurious.
In a well-marked antithesis like ταῦτα μὲν
...
χειμῶνι, τοῦ δὲ ... θέρους, an author could insert any
parenthesis he chose between the μὲν
and δὲ
clauses. (So Andoc. 1, 29
περὶ
μὲν
τῶν μυστηρίων summarises what has preceded: then
follows a parenthesis of five sections: then in 34 περὶ δὲ
τῶν ἀναθημάτων introduces what follows.)
Ἐς μὲν ... ἐστράτευσαν δ’
—cf. c.
94,
4, 98, 2.
πέμψαντες ... ἔλεγον
—c.
6,
2.
Οὐ δίκαια
—cf. c.
5,
5, the Plataeans had told the Thebans ὅτι
οὐ
τὰ
πεποιημένα ὁσίως δράσειαν. They now appeal both to τὸ δίκαιον and τὸ
καλόν. πατέρων ὧν ἐστε
—
= τῶν πατέρων. Παυσανίας
—this
was done after the battle of Plataea, 479 B C., after burying the
fallen in the territory of Plataea, which was declared autonomous
and inviolable.
ἐλευθερώσας
—this would remind the
Spartans of their professed object in the present war. How could it
be ἄξιον ἑαυτῶν to come ἐπὶ
δουλείᾳ τῇ Πλαταιῶν? Cf. c.
8,
4.
ἐλευθερώσας . . θύσας
—the first partic. is
prior in time to the second, and the second prior to the main verb.
Cf. c.
52,
3 φθάσαντες . . ἐπιθέντες ... ὑφῆπτον. ξυνάρασθαι
τὸν κ.
— cf. Demosth. 1, 24
ς. τὰ
πράγματα, but the gen. is commoner.
Ἐλευθερίῳ
—Pausanias
mentions an altar of Zeus Eleutherius and a festival called
Eleutheria at Plataea.
ἀπεδίδου
—‘conceded’
the right, the imperf. representing the details of the act,
αὐτονόμους
—with
ἔχοντας. στρατεῦσαι
—the
change of tense from οἰκεῖν shows
that the pres. denotes the continuous, the aor. the single act.
εἰ δὲ μή
—
introduces the alternative, whether a positive or a negative
precedes.
ἀμύνειν
—‘Pausanias can scarcely have
offered these guarantees in the name of the confederacy without a
resolution of the council of strategi to this effect.’ Busolt, G. Gesch. III. p. 212.
Τάδε
—c.
41,
2.
τῶν ἡμῖν ἐχθίστων
—c.
1
τῶν
ἑκατέροις ξυμμάχων.
Ὁρκίους γενομένους
—cf.
Livy, XXI. 10 foederum arbitros ac testes.
τοὺς ὑμετέρους πατρῴους καὶ ἡ·
ἐγχωρίους
—‘the gods of your race
and of our country.’
πατρῶοι are gods of a family. Cl. says the one art.
shows that the same gods are meant by both expressions, but it may
only show that the θεοὶ ὅρκιοι are
contrasted with the θ. πατρῷοι and θ. ἐγχώριοι. The θ.
ὅρκιοι, Arn. says, would be affronted by the violation
of the oath; the θ.
πατρῷοι of Sparta because the act of Pausanias was
annulled; the θ. ἐγχώριοι of
Plataea because they would be driven into exile if the strangers
seized their land.
ἐδικαίωσε
—c.
41,
5.
Τοσαῦτα
—c.
12,
1.
ὑπολαβὼν
—‘in
answer’; as often in Plato.
δίκαια λέγετε
—
i.e. the justice of your words depends on how far your own
acts correspond to your statements.
αὐτονομεῖσθε
—imper.
αὐτῶν
—the influence of
the rel. is lost. Cf. c.
4,
5.
τῶν ἄλλων
—i.e.
those who did not take part in the battle and ceremony of 479, and
are now under the rule of Athens.
ἧς
—cf. c.
43,
4 οὓς νῦν ὑμεῖς.
μετασχόντες
—share
in the liberation of Greece as your confederates did then.
πρότερον
—the
occasion is unknown.
μηδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων
—c.
67,
4.
δέχεσθε
—c.
7,
2.
Ἀδύνατα
—the
plur. points to the details of a com- plicated action.
ἄνευ
—c.
70,
4.
παρ’ ἐκείνοις
—cf. c.
21,
3.
εἷεν
—the infin. is usual after γὰρ on continuing Or.
Obliqua, and this is the only instance of the opt. in Thuc. See
also on c.
80,
1, M. T. 675.
οὐκ ἐπιτρέπωσι
—
i.e. to remain neutral.
ἔνορκοι
—‘being
included in the treaty in consequence of the stipulation that
the
Plataeans should admit both.’
πειράσωσι
—in the sense of πειρῶμαι. Cf. c.
19,
1, 77, 2. Several MSS. read
πειράσουσι, and the fut. indic. after a verb of
fearing is occasionally found, as
Aristoph. Eccles. 465, Plat.
Rep. V. p. 451 A. But there is no case in Thuc.
Ὑμεῖς δὲ
—here
δὲ =
ἀλλὰ in an answer.
γῆς ὅρους
—art. omitted in a
geographical expression. Cf. c.
13,
6.
ἕξομεν
—sc. ἂ ἂν
παραλάβωμεν.
παρακαταθήκην
—pred.
Cf. Plat. Rep. I. p. 332 ἀποδοῦναι παρακαταθεμένῳ.
ἐργαζόμενοι
—cf. χρήματα ἔνεργα.
ταρσοῖς
—this
word describes almost any series of parallel lines, as in
basket-work; here reed wattles, (Used also of the ‘tarsal’ bones
in
the hand and foot; of a bird's wing, and of a bank of oars. The
Atticists and their followers notice the word extensively.)
καλάμου
—gen.
of material.
ἐνίλλοντες
—the primary sense is ‘to
twist, roll.’ It is connected with ἰλλός,
a squint, and Pausanias the Atticist gives ἐνίλλειν’
τὸ ὀφθαλμοῖς
καταμωκᾶσθαι (to mock at anyone by winking). From this
notion of twisting the word comes to mean ‘to squeeze.’ (This word
is much noticed by the Atticists. L. and S. are unsatisfactory; Arn.
has a good note.)
τὸ διῃρημένον
—‘the hole’ in the χῶμα.
διαχεόμενον
—sc. αὐτό, what has just been
described, viz. the
χῶμα as repaired with the wattles. Cf. c.
75,
2.
Τοῦτο
—accus.
of respect. [
καὶ ξυντεκμηράμενοι
]— as the χῶμα was close to the wall and touched
it at the base, it is plain that the Plataeans would not need any τεκμήρια to discover how far to burrow.
The edd. speak of calculating distance and direction, but the
Peloponnesians had nothing to do but to dig straight ahead, until
the χῶμα began to subside.
χοῦν
—the earth of the χῶμα, as it fell into the mine.
Ὀλίγοι πρὸς πολλοὶς
—a common antithesis; c.
100,
5; I. 110; III. 112; IV. 26; V. 80; VII. 87. ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν
—as
the enemy gained on them, the Plataeans built a crescent-shaped
wall, concave to the besiegers, starting from the extremities of
that part of the wall opposite the χῶμα,
so that in case the enemy should take the raised wall by storm, they
might find another wall behind.
αὐτοῖ
—i.e.
τοῦ μεγάλου
τείχους) (τοῦ βραχέος
= the part which had not been raised.
ἐκ τοῦ ἐντὸς
—‘inside,’ like a parte.
μᾶλλον
— they had not been exposed to a
cross-fire before. Thuc. means that the further in to the crescent
the Peloponnesians got in building the χῶμα,
the more exposed they would be to a fire from each side: προχωροῦντας
ἔσω belongs to γίγνεσθαι
also. (There is no need to explain this, as one scholar does, as for ἐν ἀμ. γιγνομένους
μᾶλλον πονεῖν,) Cf. Tac.
Hist.
v. 11, of the siege of Jerusalem, muri
per
artem obliqui aut introrsus sinuati,
ut latera oppugnantium ad ictus patescerent.
τοῦ μ. οἰκοδομήματος
—after ἐπὶ μέγα, which = μέγα μέρος and replaces the accus,
after κατέσεισε, as in IV. 100
it replaces a nom., ἐσεσιδήρωτο ἐπὶ μέγα τοῦ
ἄλλου ξύλου. κατὰ
—‘by.’ Cf. c.
99,
1. Aeschin.
2, 124
εἰσπλεῖν κατὰ τὸν ποταμόν.
κατέσεισε
—‘shook.’
ἄλλας
—sc.
προσῆγον. καὶ δοκοὺς
—the
rel. sentence is changed to a principal; this is due to the length
of the second clause.
ἀπὸ τῆς τομῆς ἑ.
—‘at both ends,’ sc. τῶν δοκῶν. This belongs to
ἀρτήσαντες, as also does ἀπὸ
κεραιῶν, stout poles, like a ship's yard-arm, made fast to
the wall and projecting from it above the siege engines.
ἀνελκύσαντες
—on the double partic. with ἀφίεσαν, see c.
15,
2.
ἐγκαρσίας
—at an angle to the μηχαναί,
χαλαραῖς
—‘by
letting the chains go.’
διὰ χειρὸς
—c.
13,
2.
τὸ προέχον
—‘the
point.’
ἐμβολῆς
—‘head’
of the ram.
ἐπιστρατείᾳ
—cf.
ἐπίπλους c.
17,
4. Thuc. would have written τοῖς
Πλαταιεῦσι were it not for the proximity of so many
datives. Cf. ἐπιβοήθεια τῇ νήσῳ
III.
51;
ἐπιδρομὴν τῷ τειχίσματι
IV. 23; for the obj. = gen. cf. VII. 70
τῶν υὲν φυλακὴν τῶν δ’ ἑπιβουλήν.
Βοττιαίους
—in the
N.W. of Chalcidice, which was called Βοττική. ἀκμάζοντος
—c.
19,
1.
τρίτος αὐτός
—Intr.
p. lxxvii. He had power superior to that of his colleagues for
this
expedition.
Σπάρτωλον
—between
Olynthus and Apollonia.
προσχωρήσειν ὑπὸ
—pass. of προσάγεσθαι c.
30,
2.
ἔνδοθεν
—regarded from the Athenian point of view.
πρασσόντων
—c.
2,
3.
ὁπλῖται τε καὶ στρατιὰ
—‘hoplites and other
troops,’ the general being again added to the particular. Cf. c.
78,
3.
ἐς
—‘as
a.’
Χαλκιδέων
—those
from Olynthus.
ἱππέας
—the Athenian cavalry were
defeated in 431 twice during the invasion of Attica, c. 19, 22.
Εἶχον
—sc. οἱ
Ἀθηναῖοι. Κρουσίδος
—on
the Ther- maic Gulf.
ἐπιβοηθοῦσιν
—sc. τοῖς
Χαλκιδεῦσι.
Προσγιγνομένοις
—‘by
the arrival of this reinforce- ment’
ἀναχωροῦσι
—sc. οἱ
Ἀθηναῖοι.
ᾟ δοκοίη
—cf. c.
100,
5, per
occasionem adequitantes.
ἐπὶ πολύ
—of space, as c.
75,
2.
Ὑποσπόνδους
—see c.
92,
4.
τοὺς αὑτῶν
—contrasted with those of the
enemy; not implying that the Chalcidians and Bottiaeans separately
took up their dead. Cf. IV.
97,
1.
Ἀμπρακιῶται
—they had made an attack on
Argos in concert with the Chaones and other tribes of barbarians in
the autumn of 430 B.C. c.
68,
9. The Chaones were possibly a remnant of the Pelasgi. Hence they
are sometimes treated as Greeks, though Thuc. always calls them
barbarians. Grote, II. p. 234, Curtius, Hist.
G. I. 104 ‘In later times they were regarded as barbarians
... but, according to their origin, they could claim perfect
equality with the other branches of the Greek people.’ (Cf. Matthew
Arnold, Lit. and Dogma, init.)
πᾶσαν
—this elaborate undertaking is in
marked contrast, with the issue, c. 82; and it
is quite in Thuc.'s manner to make the opening imposing under such
circumstances. Cf. c.
7,
2.
Ἀθηναίων
— the Ambraciots were actuated
by the tribe hatred existing in that quarter, and they had an old
grudge against Phormio (c.
68
).
Now that Athens was in difficulties, they took the chance of
revenge, and were at pains to demonstrate to Sparta that they were
very important friends to her.
ἀδυνάτων
— through being occupied with
the fleet, and in protecting their coasts.
τῶν
ἀπὸ θ. Ἀ.—ἀπὸ is for
ἐπὶ by attraction to
ξυμβοηθεῖν, ‘the Acarnanians on the sea-coast would be
unable to aid’ the inland tribes.
κρατήσουσι ἔσοιτο
—the indic. and opt. in
the same sentence in Or. Obl.
M. T 670.
ὁμοίως
—‘would
not find it so easy to.’
ἐλπίδα ... λαβεῖν
—
ἐλπίς ἐστι regularly has aor. infin.,
like εἰκός ἐστι c.
11,
8.
Ναύπακτον
—this
appealed equally to the Spartans, Corinthians, and Ambraciots;
as
the position of the conquered Messenians was a chronic insult to
Sparta, Phormio interfered with the western trade of Corinth,
and
the Ambraciots too had their grudge against him.
Ἔτι
—c.
66,
2. Cnemus' year of office had not yet quite expired. For ἔτι of a period nearly complete, cf. c.
59,
3.
ἐπὶ ναυσὶν
—the dat. only here and IV. 10,
3. The gen. is regular, as c.
57,
1. So Demosth.
45, 30 says τὰ ἐπὶ τραπέζης
ὄντα, 27, 11 μνᾶς ἐπὶ τῇ
τραπέζη?; Aristoph. Eq. 754
ἐπὶ
ταυτησὶ
καθῆται τῆς πέτρας, ib. 783 ἐπὶ
ταῖσι πέτραις καθήμενον. There is no difference of
sense, but the dat. is rare except with names
of places. (Rutherford, Babrius, p. 7,
wrongly denies the existence of this dat. in comedy.)
ναυτικῷ
—abstract
for concrete.
Λευκάδα
—an ally of Sparta, c.
9,
2, and a convenient point from which to attack Acarnania.
Ἦσαν ... ξυμ
—c.
12,
2.
ἐν παρασκευῇ
—c.
17,
5.
ἐκ Λευκάδος ... ἀφικόμενον ἐν
Λευκάδι
—a convement inaccuracy, as in
c.
70,
3. For ἐκ
Λ., αὐτόθεν would have been more accurate.
Λαθόντες
—i.e. he
passed the mouth of the Gulf of Corinth on his way to Leucas without
being detected.
εἴκοσι
—c.
69
.
Ἀρχικοῦ
—the presidency was in the hands
of a particular family. The Chaones, then a powerful tribe,
subsequently lost their importance, and were little more than a name
in the time of Augustus. Verg. G. I. 8; II.
67. They, with the Molossi and Thesproti were the chief Epirot
tribes.
Μολοσσοὺς
—became
under Pyrrhus the rulers of Epirus.
Ἀτιντᾶνας
—bordered
on the Parauaei near the river Aous.
Ὀροίδῳ
—both with
ξυνεστρατεύοντο and
ἐπιτρέψαντος .
Κρύφα
—he was supposed to be an ally of
Athens, c.
29,
6.
ὕστερον
—c.
5,
3.
Ἐπορεύετο
—he
started from Ambracia.
Λιμναίαν
—between Argos and Anactorium, now Kravassara, and the natural
point
of departure from the Gulf of Ambracia to the Gulf of Corinth.
The
first object of the expedition was to obtain control of this
route.
Στράτον
—on the Achelous, now Sourovigli.
In 168 B.C. Livy says it was urbs
validissima: now it is a poor village.
Οὔτε ... τε
—the
two results, like the two causes, are introduced by parallel
clauses.
ἔπεμπον κελεύοντες
—c.
6,
2.
Οἱ Π. καὶ οἱ ξ.
—the former=those sent with Cnemus,
the latter the Ambraciots and barbarians. See c.
9,
2.
λόγοις ... ἔργῳ
—the
antithesis gives a good idea of their confidence that they would
succeed.
Μέσον
—art. omitted, as with δεξιὸν κέρας. προς‐
ῇσαν
—i.e.
ᾗσαν πρὸς την
πόλιν.
Διὰ φυλακῆς ἔ.
—cf. c.
13,
2, but here ἔχειν is intrans., as
in VII. 8,
3.
ἀξιούμενοι
—‘considered,’
οὔτ’ ἐπέσχον
—sc. τὸν
νοῦν, ‘had no intention.’ This description is slightly
sarcastic.
τὸ στρατόπεδον
—
i.e. the camp which they had arranged to form, 2 above.
καταλαβεῖν
—‘occupy,’ establish
themselves in, as III. 31
τῶν
πόλεων καταλαβεῖν τινα. (According to Behrendt's
conjecture, the sense would be ‘did not pause in their effort to
occupy Stratus before the Greeks’; τὸ
belonging to the infin., cf. VII.
33,
3 ἐπέσχον
τὸ εὐθέως
ἐπιχειρεῖν.)
αὐτοβοεὶ
—noted by Marcellinus as ἀρχαιότερον τῶν κατ’ αὐτὸν
χρόνων. Cf. c.
77,
3
φακέλους.
Ἔτι προσιόντας
—
i.e. that they had not halted, like the Greeks. Cf. ἔτι προσελθεῖν below and c.
21,
1.
ὁμοίως
—‘as they had intended.’
ὁμόσε χωρήσαντες
—c.
62,
3.
Καταστάντων
—i.e.
τῶν Χαόνων καὶ
τῶν
ἄλλων. M. T. 848.
Οἰηθῆναι
—sc. τοὺς
Ἕλληνας. For the change of sub- ject, cf. c.
3,
4.
καταληψομένους
—sc. τοὺς
βαρβάρους.
Ἐνέκειντο—κατὰ κράτος ἔφευγον. Schol.
The word, generally used of the pursuing party, well expresses the
eagerness with which the barbarians rushed upon the lines of the Greeks.
ἀνελάμβανον
—as
they arrived in scattered bodies.
ἄνευ ὅ. κινηθῆναι
—without arms they could
not stir, and even ξὺν
ὅπλοις it was dangerous for small foraging parties.
τοῦτο ποιεῖν
—i.e.
σφενδονᾶν. Cf. c.
11,
8.
Ἀπὸ θαλάσσης ἄνω
—‘that the Acarnanians on the
coast might not aid those in the interior.’ For the attraction of ἀπὸ θαλάσσης, cf. c.
80,
1. ἄνω adds nothing to the sense,
and is in fact synonymous with ἀπὸ
θ.
ἠναγκάσθησαν
— plur. after ναυτικὸν as often. [
τῆς κ.τ.λ.
]—ὁ
αὐτὸς always takes the dat.
εἴκοσι
—c.
69,
1.
Παραπλέοντας
—‘as they were sailing out
of the gulf along the coast,’
i.e.
ἔξω belongs to the
partic.
ἐν τῇ εὐρυχωρίᾳ
—‘in
the open sea,’ so as to have space for manœuvring.
Στρατιωτικώτερον
—
i.e.
ἐπὶ στρατείαν
μᾶλλον. Cf. c.
87,
2. They intended to make descents on the coast of Acarnania, cf. c.
80,
1.
κομιζομένων
—belongs in sense to ἀντιπαραπλέοντας far more than to ἑώρων
αὐτοὺς which only makes a periphrasis for
ἀντιπαρέπλεον. Cf. εἶχον
ἐμπείρους c.
4,
2.
Πατρῶν
—now
the largest town in Peloponnese, but its importance only dates
from
the 1st century A.D. Its greatest distinction is that here the
patriots in 1821 first rose against the Turks.
διαβάλλοντες
— =
διαβαίνοντες. This intrans. use elsew here only in Herod.
and poets.
Χαλκίδος
—on
the coast of Aetolia, now Varassova, at the mouth of the Euenus,
now
Phidhari. It had belonged to Corinth, but had been taken by the
Athenians 456 B.C. It lay at the foot of the mountain of the
same
name.
Εὐήνου
—Ovid, Met.
9, 104 fol. relates how Hercules slew Nessus here.
ἀφορμισάμενοι
—‘though they had slipped
from their moorings in the night’; in order to elude the Athenians,
the fleet tried to cross over to Acarnania before daybreak. The
battle took place soon after dawn, c.
84,
2.
ἔλαθον precedes κατεῖδον
in time, and is plup. in sense.
πορθμόν
—i.e. in
the middle of the Gulf of Patrae, in the open, as Phormio had
planned; and therefore between Patrae and Chalcis.
Παρεσκευάζοντο
—cf. c.
7,
1. The imperf., as Cl. says, is due to the
distributive nature of the act described.
Διδόντες
—belongs to ὡς
μἐγιστον, the circle was as large as possible without
leaving an opening. μὴ shows that
the partic. implies preference or prohibition: ‘so as not to
afford.’
διέκπλουν
—this famous manœuvre consisted
of ‘rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus
getting in their rear, ... and before the ship of the adversary
could change its position, of striking it either in the
stern, or in some weak part.’ Grote. τὸ
ἐμβάλλειν καὶ διασχίζειν τὴν τῶν ἐναντίων
τάξιν. Schol.
τὰς πρῴρας
—sc.
ἐτάξαντο. This chiasmus is
pronounced by F. Stein to be ‘librarii additamentum prorsus
supervacaneum.’ Anyhow it is detestable. (πρῴρα
σὺν τῷ ι—, Herodian.)
διὰ βραχέος
— with
παραγιγνόμενοι, masc. in spite of
ναῦς; ‘might be at hand to sail out.’
εἴ πῃ
—they
were uncertain at what point of the circle the Athenians would
attack.
Κατὰ μίαν
—‘in
a single line,’ one ship behind the other.
ἐν χρῷ
—i.e. as
near as possible. Cf. ad
vivum resecare.
δόκησιν
—c.
35,
2.
ἐμβαλεῖν
—fut. Cl. quotes IV. 55
δόκησίς τι πράξειν. προείρητο
...
ὑπὸ
—the
construction is due to αὐτοῖς.
Εἰώθει
—sc.
αὐτὸ from
ὅπερ, cf. c.
4,
5.
ὁπόταν
— cf. c.
11,
6.
τότε
—i.e. when
the wind threw them into confusion.
γίγνεσθαι
—might be
ἔσεσθαι—‘quod enim fit non est, sed erit.’ Sta. Cf. IV. 24
ἤλπιζον .. χειρώσεσθαι,
καὶ ἤδη σφῶν ἰσχυρὰ τὰ πράγματα γίγνεσθαι.
Κατῄει
—c.
25,
4.
ὑπ’ ἀμφοτέρων
—with προσκει‐
μένων.
βοῇ τε
—the
τε adds the third fact. For the disturbance, cf. Eur.
Hec. 607
ναυτική τ’
ἀναρχία | κρείσσων πυρός. ἀναφέρειν
—owing
to the stiff breeze and heavy sea they could not clear the water.
ἀλκὴν
—‘resistance,’
robur. So Herod., common in poets and found frequently in Xen.
as Ages. 10, 1; but not found in any other
Attic prose.
Δύμην
—W.
of Achaea; the exact site doubtful.
Μολύκρειον
—a
small town near Antirrhium.
Πο‐ σειδῶνι
—cf. Aristoph. Eq. 561
ὦ Γεραίστιε (Poseidon, from Geraestus,
the site of a temple) παῖ
Κρόνου,
Φορμίωνί τε φίλτατ’ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων
τε θεῶν Ἀθηναίοις, referring to Poseidon's victories,
and to the success at Pylus.
Ῥίῳ
—cf. c.
86,
2; called also τὸ Ἀντίρριον, now
Kastro Roumelias, 11/4 mile from the Rhium on the opposite coast.
See L. and S. s.v.
ῥίον .
Κυλλήνην
—opposite
Zacynthus, and a port of im- portance, of which there are no
remains.
Λευκάδος
—
Cnemus was left at Oeniadae. Thence he had crossed to Leucas.
Ἔχει
— =
παρέχει: ‘does not support a conclusion which can
justly cause you alarm.’ [τὸ]
ἐκφοβῆσαι
— omitting τὸ take
ἐκφοβῆσαι with
δικαίαν, as in IV. 17
δίκαιοί
εἰσι καὶ ἀπιστότατοι εἶναι. The conclusion they drew
from the preceding battle was that they would be defeated in the
coming battle: and this conclusion caused them φοβεῖσθαι
τὴν μέλλουσαν. But the battle, they are told, does not
afford the τεκμήρια for such a
conclusion. (τὸ ἐκφοβῆσαι cannot
be accus. of respect, as in c.
53
τὸ
προταλαιπωρεῖν, because such an accus. would here
certainly contain a reference to the expected issue of the coming
fight. The usual translation ‘ground for fear’ gives a wrong sense
to every one of the three words. If πεφοβῆσθαι were read, the construction
would be δικαίαν
πεφοβῆσθαι, = ‘which it is right to fear,’ ἡ τέκμαρσις δικαία ἐστι —πεφοβῆσθαι
being equivalent to δἰκαιόν ἐστι τὴν
τέκμαρσιν
πεφοβῆσθαι, infin. of purpose.)
Ἐπὶ στρατείαν
—c.
83,
3.
τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τ
—the wind and sea, c.
84,
3.
καὶ πού τι καὶ
—the expression barely does more
than suggest the possibility of what was certain. The object is to
blame τύχη and excuse γνώμη.
Κατὰ
—‘owing
to.’
προσεγένετο
—much like ἐπι‐ γίγνεσθαι, c.
4,
2, but the defeat is regarded as an unavoidable occurrence added to their other disad vantages (τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης). Cf. Vergil's ‘nec
Teucris addita Juno | usquam aberit, Aen. VI.
90.
τῆς γνώμης τὸ μὴ κατὰ κράτος
νικηθέν
—=ἡ
γνώμη μὴ νικηθεῖσα. Cf. c.
59
τὸ
ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης. Militibus
fortuna victis
invictus ipsorum animus opponitur. Hache. ‘It is not right
that our minds, which we feel (
μή, not οὐ) were not
conquered by force but have still some answer to give, should be
depressed by the result of mere accident.’
κατὰ κράτος
— vi,
as in κατὰ κ. αἱρεῖν.
ἀντιλογίαν
—sc. πρὸς τὸ κατὰ κράτος νικηθῆναι , viz. the answer that the disaster was due to ἀπειρία, τύχη, want of παρασκευή. A familiar word in Plato.
ξυμφορᾶς
—opposed to
γνώμης above.
νομίσαι
—sc.
δίκαιον. ἀνδρείους
ὀρθῶς
—‘really
brave,’ ὀρθῶς as in Aristoph. Eq. 1085
.
ἀπειρίαν ...
προβαλλομένους
—‘make
in experience an excuse.’
τοῦ ἀνδρείου π.
—‘while
courage remains.’
ἔν τινι
—neut.
Ὑμῶν δὲ
—topic τὸ
δυνατόν. Index, s.v.
τόποι. λείπεται
—sc. τῆς ἐκείνων ἐμπειρίας.
μνήμην
—‘presence of
mind.’
ἄνευ εὐψυχίας
—the
insinuation that the Athenians lacked courage is wholly
unsupported
by argument.
ἄνευ ἀλκῆς
—‘without boldness,’ as in c.
84,
3 robur; it is the result of εὐψυχία.
Ἀπαράσκευοι τυχεῖν
—for the omission of ὄντες, cf. c.
39,
4.
Πλῆθος
—c.
11,
3.
τὰ δὲ πολλὰ
—adverbial accus. For the γνώμη, cf. c.
13,
2.
Προσγενόμενα
—here of additional advantages; con- trast 3 above.
διδασκαλίαν
—cf. Aesch. Ag. 185
Ζῆνα τὸν πάθη
μάθος | θέντα κυρίως ἔχειν.
Arn.
Τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν
—cf. c.
11,
3.
τις προσταχθῇ
—the change from the plur.
to the indef. sing. is due to the intervention of ἕκαστος. On the juxtaposition of 2nd
and 3rd pers., ἑαυτὸν . . ἕπεσθε
etc. see c.
11,
1, 44, 1.
Πρότερον
—Cnemus,
Machaon, Isocrates and Aga- tharchidas.
οὐ χεῖρον
—
meiosis, not to offend the others.
ἐνδώσομεν
—as in c.
49,
4.
ἢν δέ τις
—this vague threat shows that the
officers suspected there had been cowardice in the former battle.
Cf. c.
85,
2.
οὐκ ἀξιῶν
—for the double partic. ὁρῶν ... ἀξιῶν, cf. c.
59,
3.
ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔχειν
—c.
59,
2.
Οὐκ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου
—the neg. of τὸ πλῆθος, as in c.
13,
1 παραλίπῃ καὶ μὴ δηώσῃ.
ᾧ
—i.e.
τοῦτο ᾧ,
the τοῦτο belonging to θαρσοῦσιν, lit. ‘as to that in which
they feel confidence,’ viz.
ὡς
προσῇκον
σφίσιν ἀ. εἶναι, the courage which they have shown so
often. For the construction, cf. Livy, XXI. 10 id de quo
ambigebatur, eventus belli, unde jus stabat, ei victoriam dedit.
κατορθοῦντες
—antithesis to ού δῑ ἄλλο τι. Cf. c.
65,
8. διὰ
... ἐμπειρίαν depends on
κατορθοῦντες. τὰ πλείω
—
because they had so seldom fought at sea.
καὶ οἴονται
— ‘and so they think.’ For
the change from partic. to indic., cf. V. 61,
4 βουλόμενοι ἄλλως τε ... καὶ ὅμηροι
ἦσαν. So Eur. Bacchae, 225 πρόφασιν
μὲν ὡς δὴ
μαινάδας θυοσκόους (sc.
οὔσας ), τὴν δ’ Ἀφροδίτην
πρόσθ’ ἄγειν τοῦ Βακχίου.
ποιήσειν
—subject τὴν ἐμπειρίαν.
Τὸ δ’
—i.e.
τὸ κατορθοῦν. ἐκ τοῦ δικαίου
—cf.
c.
44,
3, = δικαίως. περιέσται
—‘will
be found on our side.’
ἐν ἐκείνῳ
—i.e.
ἐν τῷ πεζῷ. εὐψυχίᾳ
—answers
the statement made in c.
87,
5.
προφέρουσι
— =
προέχειν, only used by Herod., Thuc. and poets.
τῷ δὲ
—‘owing to our superiority in
experience, we are more confident.’
Τε
—adds the third fact to πρῶτον μὲν. ἔπειτα above, and so gives
another reason for the conclusion μὴ δείσητε διὰ τὴν
—‘for
the sake of,’ with ἡγούμενοι. The
statement is general.
οὐκ ἂν
—the prot., ‘if they had had their
own way’ is implied in ἄκοντας. ἐπεχείρησαν
—emphatic.
παρὰ πολὺ
—‘decisively’; cf. c.
8,
4
Κατὰ ... καὶ ὅτι
—cf. c.
65,
7 for κατά. τοῦ παρα‐
λόγου
—cf. τῷ
οὐκ εἰκότι below; explained in οἱ
δ’ ἐκ πολλοῦ
... ἀντιτολμῶσιν: ‘worthy of our astonishing action,’
in offering battle with such inferior numbers. (τοῦ
παρὰ πολὺ is explained to mean τοῦ
παρὰ πολὺ προνενικηκέναι, but (1) this is not clear, (2)
the previous victory has just been referred to and the probability
of another sufficiently implied in κατὰ τὸ
προνενικηκέναι: a new reason is now wanted, (3) the next
section, introduced by γὰρ, is
meaningless.)
Ἀντίπαλοι
—‘most
men, when they are a match for the enemy.’
πίσυνοι
—found also
V. 14,
3; VI. 2,
6; otherwise only in Herod. and poets. Cf. Ruth. New
Phryn. p. 21. The ordinary word is
πιστεύων, as in 2 above.
ἐκ πολλῷ ὑποδεεστέρων
—sc. ἐπιόντες: cf. ἀπ’
ἐλασσόνων
ὁρμώμενος c 65, 2, ‘whose means
are far inferior.’
τῆς διανοίας τὸ β.
—‘strength
of will.’
τῷ οὐκ εἰκότι
—‘because
of what they never expected than on account of our expected
preparations.’ (Ste. gives up this passage, and other edd. put a
sense upon it which the words will not bear.)
κατὰ λόγον
—the Peloponnesians were
expecting the immediate arrival of reinforcements from Athens; cf.
c.
86,
6.
Ἡμεῖς
—he hints that the enemy are both ἄπειροι and
ἄτολμοι.
Τὸν ἀγῶνα
—topic τὸ
ξυμφέρον; cf. c.
11,
3.
εἶναι
—infin. of limitation, in this phrase almost confined to neg.
sentences.
ἐμβολὴν
—charge broadside, with the ἔμβολον) (
προσβολή, charge prow to prow.
ἐκ πολλοῦ
—e
longinquo.
ἀναστροφαί
—turning
back after any manœuvre to regain the original position of the
ship.
ἐν τούτῳ
—‘in these circumstances’; cf. ἐν ᾧ c.
1.
Τούτων
—in the analysis the peroration is
made to begin here. There was in antiquity some doubt about the
place where the
πίστις ends. The schol. on 10 ὁ
δὲ
ἀγὼν remarks τινὲς ἀπὸ τοῦ δὲ τοὺς ἐπιλόγους, and the same
writer puts οἱ
ἐπίλογοι to 11. Cf. the opening of the peroration in
c.
11,
9, 87, 8.
παρὰ ταῖς ναυσὶ
—Intr. p. xliii. παρὰ is rarely used thus with things,
cf. c.
43,
2; but the frequent personification of πόλις,
ναῦς, etc. renders the phrase possible. The Athenians, up
to the beginning of the action, were on shore, c.
90,
3.
δῑ ὀλίγου
—local; cf. c.
29,
3.
κόσμον
καὶ σιγὴν
—cf. c.
11,
9.
ἔς τε τὰ πολλὰ ... ναυμαχίᾳ
—for
ἐς, with
ξυμφέρει, cf. IV.
26,
5. The only other
passage in which an impersonal noun is in dat. with ξυμφέρει is VI. 83
λόγου μὲν
ἡδονῆ? τὸ παραντίκα τερπομένους, τῆ? δ’ ἐγχειρήσει ὕστερον
τὰ
ξυμφέροντα
πράσσοντας.
Ἀγὼν ... καταλῦσαι
—generally περί, ὑπέρ, or
ἕνεκα, as c.
63,
1, but here the infin. are epexegetic.
ἐλπίδα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ
—cf. πενίας ἐλπίδι, c.
42,
4.
Αὖ
—‘again.’
ἐθέλουσιν
— = εἰώθασι,
φιλοῦσι, as in Herod. and Xen.
Ἐπὶ τεσσάρων
—‘four
deep,’ in four lines.
ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτῶν γῆν
—with
ταξάμενοι, ‘drawing up their ships with the coast of
Peloponnesus at their backs’; the four lines extended back towards
the coast. (This is obscure enough, but it is the only possible
sense. ἐπὶ cannot mean παρὰ ‘along.’)
ἔσω [ἐπὶ]
—these are not possible together;
but? ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ
κ. The Peloponnesians were moving N.E. from Rhium, and
therefore in the direction of Naupactus.
δεξιῷ κέρᾳ
—when
they began to move up the gulf, the four lines of ships turned
to
the right, so that there were now four abreast, the right wing
leading.
Εἴκοσι
—the Peloponnesians had 77 ships
(c.
86,
4); as the right wing consists of 20 ships 4 abreast, the rest of
the lines were probably so arranged that every fifth line consisted
of only 3 ships abreast instead of 4, which would give 3 groups each
consisting of 19 ships.
ταύτῃ
—‘in
this direction,’ towards Naupactus.
διαφύγοιεν
—into
the open part of the gulf, eastwards.
πλέοντα τὸν ἐπίπλουν
—‘the attacking line
when it bore down on them.’ Cf. 4 below ἐπιστρέψαντες
τὰς ναῦς μετωπηδὸν ἔπλεον.
Ἐρήμῳ
—i.e.
deprived of its protection, Phormio being at Antirrhium. For the
sense, not implying that there were no people in Naupactus, cf. c.
25,
1 ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἐνόντων. κατὰ
σπουδὴν
—cf. c.
94,
2.
ἐμβιβάσας
—
imponere; the object omitted as constantly in naval and
military phrases. For the double partic. see c.
4,
4.
Μεσσηνίων
—from
Naupactus.
Ἐπὶ κέρως
—‘in
single file.’
ἀπὸ ς.
—cf. c.
92,
1.
μετωπηδὸν—τὰ μέτωπα, ὅ ἐστι τὰ πρόσωπα τῶν
νεῶν, παρεῖχον τοῖς ἐναντίοις. Schol.
i.e. they turned to the left, into four lines, as they had been
at first.
τάχους
—depends on ὡς
εἶχεν ἕκαστος. Xen. Hel. 4, 5, 15.
Τῶν δὲ
—i.e.
τούτων δὲ = πασῶν
τῶν νεῶν. τὸ κέρας
—i.e. the right wing, τὰς
εἴκοσι ναῦς of 2 above.
τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν
—cf. τὸν
ἐπίπλουν in 2 above; ‘the sudden turn.’
ἐξέωσαν
—technical,
‘to force an enemy to run his ship aground.’
ὅσοι μὴ
— = εἰ
μή
τινες.
Ἀναδούμενοι
—the imperf. partic. in this
phrase expresses the lashing of each of the
vessels. The aor. is used in VII. 74. εἷλον ἤδη
—‘had
already taken.’
ξὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις
—c.
2,
1.
Ἀπὸ
—cf. c.
90,
4.
ὀλίγον μὲν .. ἔπειτα
—para-
taxis.
Πάνορμον
—see c.
86,
4.
ἀνηγάγοντο
— equivalent to a plup., as
often in rel. clauses. M.
T. 58.
Ἓξ
—sc. οὔσας. ἄνδρας τε—τε adds the third fact
connected with the pursuit.
διαφθείραντες τὸ πρῶτον
—c.
90,
5. The whole Peloponnesian fleet, not only the 20 ships on the right
wing, fled to Panormus, as the main body of 57 ships had gone to aid
the others, and so abandoned their prizes.
Περὶ
—‘near.’
ἐξέπεσεν
—‘his body was washed up.’
Ὅθεν
— = ἐνταῦθα
ὅθεν. Cf. Demosth. 45, 81
ἀνάγειν
ὅθεν εἴληφας, Andoc. 1, 64
θεραπαίνας ἔλαβον ὅθεν ὁρμώμενοι ταῦτ’ ἐποίουν. ἀναγαγόμενοι
—viz.
κατὰ τὸ
Ἀπολλώνιον c.
91,
1.
ἔστησαν ἔστησαν δὲ καὶ
—cf. c.
7,
1, 86, 1 and 2.
ὑπόσπονδα
—thus
the Peloponnesians acknowledged themselves defeated.
Τροπαῖον τῆς τροπῆς
—the same gen. VI. 98,
4; VII. 54. ἥνπερ
—c.
90,
6.
ἀνέθεσαν ἐπὶ
—the same use of ἐπὶ as in c.
52,
4 ἐπιτιθέναι
νεκροὺς ἐπὶ πυράς, 76, 2 ἰζάνειν ἐπί. Ῥίον
—in
honour of Poseidon, c.
84,
4.
Ἀθηναίων
—see on c.
86,
6.
καὶ Κόρινθον
—i e.
Lechaeum, the port of Corinth.
Αἷς
—‘with which.’ Cf. c.
85.
Ἀφύλακτος
—yet in c.
24
Thuc. said φυλακὰς
κατε‐ στήσαντο κατὰ θάλασσαν; from which Pp concludes
that the vessels there mentioned were not armed. Thuc. however seems
to imply that the guard-ships had been withdrawn, or at least were
not always on the spot. Probably Pericles would have disapproved of
this.
ἄκλῃστος
—see c.
94,
4. Probably Brasidas planned this attack.
εἰκότως
—cf. c.
8,
1.
ἐπικρατεῖν
—sc. τοὺς
Ἀθηναίους. πολὺ —ἐπικρατεῖν takes the
place of the usual comparative.
Τροπωτῆρα
—from
τροπός, leather, and so a thong which attached the oar to
the σκαλμός, thole-pin. The
ancients did not use rowlocks like ours.
ἀφικομένους ...
καθελκύσαντας
—see c.
15,
2.
Ἦν ... προφυλάσσον
—cf. c.
67,
1.
προσδοκία ... μὴ ἄν
—after the analogy of φόβος, cf. c.
13,
1. If the time were pres., the sentence would be προσδοκία
ἐστι μὴ ἂν ἐπιπλεύσειαν. There are very few cases of
this construction, and no others in Thuc.
ἐξαπιναίως
—see c.
3,
1.
ἀπὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς
—a regular formula: cf. ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐθέος
III. 43,
5; but ἀπὸ in such phrases is less
common than ἐκ. ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου
however is often found in Thuc. This use of
ἀπὸ is not found iu the orators.
τολμῆσαι ἄν
—depends on the idea of
thinking implied in προσδοκία
ἦν. Sc. ἐπιπλεῦσαι. καθ’ ἡσυχίαν
—sc. ἐπιπλεῦσαι, ‘to make an
attack without meeting with opposition.’ Intr. p. xliv. Cf. Arist.
Eccles. 288
κατὰ
σκότον = clam.
μὴ οὐκ
—cf. I. 141
τὸ οὐ βἐβαιον ἔχοντες μὴ
οὐ προαναλώσειν. M. T. 817.
Καὶ ἐχώρουν—καὶ marks the carrying
out of the plan they had formed. In this idiom the rel. sense of ὡς, ‘as,’ is hardly distinguished from the
temporal. Cf. c.
2,
4.
οὐκέτι
—again there is irony in the
narrative. Cf. c.
80,
1.
Σαλαμῖνος
—first for emphasis. Cf. c.
7,
2, 11, 2.
ὁρῶν
— cf. c.
55,
1.
νεῶν τ. φυλακή
—cf. c.
69,
1. ἐπ’
αὐτοῦ has a slightly different meaning with φυλακή, as though it were περὶ αὐτό. With φρούριον
ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀκρωτηρίου contrast τροπαῖον
ἐπὶ τῇ ἄκρᾳ
VIII.
106.
See c.
80,
2.
Ἐγένετο
—Thuc.
probably knew more of Thrace than any other Greek owing to his
property, infleuce, and sojourn there.
μέγεθος
—accus.
of respect.
ἐπὶ μὲν θ. καθήκουσα
— ‘extended along the coast
line,’ cf. c.
27,
2) (ἐς
ἤπειρον. The construction is ἐγένετο
καθήκουσα, like ἦν
καθήκουσα, cf. c.
80,
2, 93, 2; lit. extended down to the sea.
μέχρι Ἴστρου ποταμοῦ
—cf. Isocr. VII. 80 ἐντὸς Ἅλυος ποταμοῦ, the only case in
Attic outside Thuc. where the art. is omitted with the name when
ποταμὸς is inserted. The omission is common in Herod.:
there are six cases in Thuc.
περίπλους
—with τεσσάρων
ἡμερῶν. Cf. VI. 1
Σικελίας (
‐α Kr., Hw.) περίπλους ἐστιν
.. ὀκτὼ ἡμερῶν. τὰ ξυντομώτατα
—adverbial.
ἱστῆται
—stet, of
anything which does not shift its position.
νηὶ ς.
— =
ὁλκάδι .
Διὰ πλείστου .. ἐγίγνετο
—‘for
in this direction it extended furthest into the interior.’
ἁνύσαι
—epexegetic to ἦν ἡ ἀρχή.
Ἦρξαν
—ingressive, as ἀρχθῶσι c.
8,
4.
Σεύθου
—
nephew of Sitalces.
βασιλεύσας
—ingressive, as c.
15,
2. Coutrast c.
80,
6.
δύναμις
—sc.
ἦν, ‘amounted in all to about.’
δῶρα
—not
voluntary, but like Edward IV.'s benevoleuces.
ὅσα
—see c.
13,
4. Cf. I. 16. λεῖα
—‘plain,’
unembroidered.
κατασκευή—ὑφαντά etc. are
reckoned among these ‘effects.’
αὐτῷ
—emphatic.
παραδυναστεύουσι
—‘princes.’
Περσῶν
—probably
refers to the practice of giving bounties as rewards for public
services.
λαμβάνειν
—hinting
that these presents were really exactions.
κατὰ τὸ δύνασθαι
—‘owing to their power’ (to exact money).
ἐπὶ πλέον
— =
μᾶλλον. αὐτῷ
—i.e.
τῷ νόμῳ. ἐχρήσαντο
—sc. οἱ Ὀδρυσαί.
Ἐπὶ μέγα ἰσχύος
—cf. c.
17,
4.
τῶν γὰρ
—sc.
βασιλειῶν. ὅσαι
—cf.
3 above.
εὐδαιμονίᾳ
—of wealth, as beatus. Cf. Eur.
Bacchae, 16 Ἀραβίαν εὐδαίμονα. πολὺ δευτέρα μετὰ
—‘far
inferior to.’ (Arn. trauslates ‘easily second,’ quoting Soph.
O. C. 1228
μὴ φῦναι τὸν ἄπαντα
νικᾷ
λόγον· τὸ δὲ
... βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθενπερ ἥκει πολὺ δεύτερον ὡς τάχιστα,
but there too the δεύτερος πλοῦς
is ‘far inferior’ to the πρῶτος πλοῦς
.)
Ἕν πρὸς ἓν
—cf. Herod. IV. 50 ἓν πρὸς ἓν συμβάλλειν. οὐκ
ἔστιν ὅ τι
— = οὐδέν, otherwise οὐκ would not be inserted here after οὐδέ. οὐ
μὴν οὐδὲ
—‘not
that they are on a level with other nations in general prudence and
intelligence in the employment of the ordinary resources of life.’
ξύνεσιν
— meaning that the Scythians,
with their natural advantages (τὰ
παρόντα ἐς τὸν βίον), might have been a great nation
if they had been blessed with the sense to pursue a definite policy.
Ἐν
—would be
ἐς had not the muster at Doberus already been referred
to.
κατὰ κορυφὴν
— = ἄνωθεν,
κατὰ
via like κατὰ κράτος, expressing the manner; cf.
c.
76,
4.
τὴν κάτω Μ.—τὸ παράλιον. Schol.
Τῶν γὰρ
—‘for, besides the lower
Macedonians, there are also Macedonians in the upper country,
amongst whom are iucluded the L. and E.’ Note
in Jowett.
Λιγκησταὶ
—
the district called Lyncestis.
Ἐλιμιῶται
—divided
from Thessaly by the Cambunian mountains.
βασιλείας
—‘have
kings of their own.’ J.
Τὴν δὲ περὶ
—not
παρά, because the regions en umerated below are not merely
those actually on the coast, but comprise ἡ
κάτω
γῆ generally.
Τημενίδαι
—hence
Philip and Alexander claimed to be Greeks, and their claim was
generally admitted.
ἐβασίλευσαν
—ingressive.
Πιερίας
—between
Mt. Olympus and the Thermaic Gulf, the origiual home of the
muses
and birth-place of Orpheus.
ὑπὸ τὸ Πάγγαιον
—after
this both the Pieres and Orpheus were connected with Thrace.
κόλπος
—see L. and S.
οἰκοῦσιν
—their
new home was Bottice. They originally dwelt near Pella.
Στενήν
—the Paeonians had possessed ‘a
narrow strip on the bank of the Axius, down to Pella and the sea.’
Grote points out that this would leave hardly any room for the
Bottiaeans, who dwelt north of the Pierians, between the mouth of
the Haliacmon (the Indjeh Kara-su) and that of the Axius. Probably
Thuc. is mistaken in saying μέχρι
θαλάσσης, and the Paeonians did not extend so far
east.
Μυγδονίαν
—
Herod. VII. 123 says the Axius divided Bottia on the south from
Mygdonia on the north. Iu this region lived also the Edonians,
Crestonians, and Bisaltae (6 below), but the Mygdonians must
have
been the most important.
Ἐορδίας
—east
of Lyncestis. N.W. of the Elimiots.
Φύσκαν
—somewhere
between the Strymon and Axius.
κατῴκηται
—c.
96,
1.
Ἀλμωπίας
—some
where near Eordia and Pieria.
Οὗτοι
—=οἱ
κάτω; the tribes who were led by the Temenidae and
conquered all lower Macedonia, the part which has been described
from 3 above. Contrast Μακεδόνες
αὐτοὶ below, = the original Macedonians before the
conquests, οἱ ἄνω, who remained
partially independent, c.
99,
2.
αὐτῶν
— those just mentioned were not of Macedonian stock.
Λόγους ἐποιεῖτο
—‘had
a conference.’ Livy would have reported this conversation at
length.
οὐ παρῆσαν
— c.
95,
3. The incompetence displayed by Athens against Perdiccas is so
strange that the ambassadors sent to Sitalces may have been bribed:
for they might easily have sent word when Sitalces really did start.
The muddle which followed the death of Pericles is as great as the
confusion in the English government during the Bute ministry after
the fall of Pitt in 1761. Perhaps it is partly due to the same
cause.
ἀπιστοῦντες
—Sitalces had become an ally
two years before, and his promise had been unfulfilled till now. Cf.
c. 29.
ἔπεμψαν
—‘had
sent.’
Ἐν π. ἦσαν
—c.
80,
3. The Thessalians and the other Greeks rightly regarded Sitalces
now as a mere plunderer.
Θρᾷκες
—the
tribes living in the plains on the lower Strymon, near
Amphipolis.
Παρέσχε λόγον
—on the analogy of φόβον παρέχειν, as μὴ below shows: ‘even as far as the ...
he caused questionings.’
ἐπὶ
—denotes distance, as in ἐφ’ ὅσον, c.
62,
2.
ὑπ’ αὐτῶν ἀγόμενοι
—‘induced
by the Athenians.’
κατὰ τὸ ξ.
—c.
22,
2.
χωρήσωσιν
—The change to the plur.,
suggesting Θρᾶκες, adds a notion
of vague terror to the narrative. This small artifice shows how
perpetually Thuc. produces pathos by saying the least
that cau possibly be said. Cf. Eur. Hec. 277
μή
μου τὸ τἐκνον ἐκ χερῶν ἀποσπάση?ς | μηδὲ
κτάνητε.
Ἅμα ἐπέχων
—‘as
he overran them.’
εἶχεν αὐτῳ
—cf. c.
102,
2.
ὑπὸ χειμῶνος
—one
would have supposed that Sitalces would have foreseen this.
ἀναπείθεται
—c.
14,
1.
Σεύθου
—he
succeeded Sitalces. Spardacus was brother of Sitalces.
ὥστ’
—cf. c.
2,
4.
ἐπ’ αὐτῇ
—‘along with.’ Cf. Isaeus, 2, 5 ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδελφῆ? προῖκα.
προσποιεῖται
—sibi conciliat.
Τὰς πάσας
—‘in
all.’
κατὰ τάχος
—again Thuc. contrasts the
slightness of the result with the vastness of the plan. Cf. c.
7,
2.
ὑπέσχετο
—contrast c.
95,
2.
Ἀστακοῦ
—the Corinthians had restored the
tyrant Euarchus who had been expelled by the Athenians, c. 31, 33. Cl. thinks the place must have since
joined Athens.
Στράτου
—c.
80,
8: Coronta is unknown.
Οἰνιάδας
—c.
82.
As Oeniadae had helped Cnemus effectually, it would have been
advantageous to puuish it and prevent it from doing more harm to
Athens.
ἄνωθεν μὲν
— sc.
ῥἐων, ‘flowing past Stratus high up the stream.’
ἐξιεὶς
—of water discharging itself into the sea, only in Thuc. and
Herod.
The meaning reappears in Polybius.
περιλιμνάζων
—this applies to the winter only.
Ἐχινάδων
—the
object of this digression is probably to show that it was as
difficult to attack Oeniadae by sea as by land.
προσχοῖ
—‘forms
deposits.’
ἠπείρωνται
— = ἤπειρος
γεγένηνται. οὐκ ἐν
πολλῷ
—c.
17,
2.
τοῦτο παθεῖν
—pass. of τοῦτο δρᾶν, as c.
11,
8, 49, 5. This has not happened, as the sea
carries away the deposits. Cf. Herod. II. 10.
Τό τε ... αἵ τε
—the double cause, as c.
95,
2.
μέγα καὶ πολὺ
—cf. c.
5,
2.
ἀλλήλαις
—‘help
one another to bind the deposits together.’
ἔχουσαι
— =
παρέχουσαι, as c.
61,
2.
Ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι
—cf. c.
13,
5, the infin. by assimi- lation to
χρῆσαι . M. T. 755. In temporal
sentences in Or. Obl. Thuc. generally retaius
the mood of the Recta, except III.
95
ἔως καταβαίη, representing ἕως ἂν καταβῶ,
IV.
117
πρὶν παρασκευάσαιντο, representiug πρὶν ἂν παρασκευασώμεθα, VII. 48
ὁπότε βούλοιντο, representing ὅταν βουλώμεθα, and III. 22,
8.
μητρός
—Eriphyle, c.
68,
3.
χρῆσαι
—this meaning occurs in Herod.,
Thuc., and tragedy only. The Attic is
ἀναιρεῖν. οἰκεῖν
—pres.
(or aor.) infin. after words meaning to give
an
oracle. M. T. 98.
ὑπειπόντα
—‘saying besides,’ as in I. 90,
4.
λύσιν τῶν δειμάτον
—technical words of the
oracle. Cf. Pausan. 2, 29. 6 ἐς
Δελφοὺς ἀπἐστειλαν ... αἰτήσοντας λύσιν τοῦ
κακοῦ. Soph. El. 635
ἄνακτι
τῷδ’ ὅπως λυτηρίους | εὐχὰς ἀνάσχω
δειμάτων ἃ νῦν ἔχω. εὑρὼν
—sc. ταύτην τὴν γῆν. ἥτις
μήπω
—hypothetical
rel., ‘such as was not.’ The vague form is well suited to the
oracle.
αὐτῷ
—agent.
Ἱκανὴ ἂν κεχῶσθαι
—
i.e.
κεχωσμένη ἂν εἴη, ‘it
would be by this time.’
δίαιτα
—‘to make a habitation,’ pred.
with χῶσθαι. ἐδυνάστευσε
—ingressive,
as ἐβασίλευσαν c.
99.
3.
ἐπωνυμίαν
—it was called Κουρῆτις before.